SECTION MASONRY MORTAR. A. Section Unit Masonry: Mortar for concrete unit masonry.

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "SECTION MASONRY MORTAR. A. Section Unit Masonry: Mortar for concrete unit masonry."

Transcription

1 SECTION MASONRY MORTAR PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mortar for unit masonry and stone veneer RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Unit Masonry: Mortar for concrete unit masonry. B. Section Stone Veneer: Mortar for natural stone veneer REFERENCES A. ASTM C150 Portland Cement. B. ASTM C144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. C. ASTM C207 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Mortar D. ASTM C270 Mortar for Unit Masonry E. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC) - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section C. Protect cement from moisture and humidity 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC requirements. B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 10 degrees C (40 degrees F) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Typical Home Masonry Mortar

2 A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Normal Type I, white color for facebrick and grey color for common brick B. Mortar aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type; clean dry; protected from dampness, freezing, or foreign matter. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Water: Clean and potable. E. Mortar Color: Mineral oxide pigment; chocolate brown color; Great Stuff manufactured by Acme Manufacturing Co. Ltd MIXES A. Mortar for Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S, using proportion method. B. Mortar for Non-Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type N, using proportion method MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C270. B. Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install mortar in conjunction with Sections and FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field testing will be performed under provisions of Section END OF SECTION Masonry Mortar Typical Home

3 SECTION MASONRY ANCHORAGE AND REINFORCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Adjustable Reinforcement System. B. Masonry Veneer Reinforcement System RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Brick Unit Masonry. B. Section Concrete Unit Masonry. C. Section Cold Formed Metal Framing REFERENCES A. ASCE/ACI Specifications for Masonry Structures. B. ASTM A 82 - Standard Specification for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. C. ASTM A Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. D. ASTM A Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. E. ASTM A Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality. F. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvanealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. G. ASTM A Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot- Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality H. ASTM A 80 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Wire. I. ASTM A Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. J. ASTM D Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension. K. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. Typical Home Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement

4 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System tested and evaluated for Seismic Zones 3 and 4 in accordance with ICBO guidelines and ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. Evaluation Report No SUBMITALS A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements-Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard descriptive literature and printed installation instructions for each specified component. C. Verification Samples: Three samples of each specified component; for linear components, submit three samples, each one foot long. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturer: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; 30 Rasons Court, P.O. Box 5270, Hauppauge, NY ; Telephone: (516) , FAX: (516) (Delete one of the two paragraphs below; coordinate with Division 01 requirements.) B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section C. Substitutions: Not permitted. (Article below specifies reinforcement systems for multi-wythe walls having horizontal mortar joints maximum 2-1/4 inches out of alignment.) 2.2 ADJUSTABLE REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) A. Acceptable product: #180 S.I.S. Dub'l Loop-LokÔ Truss Seismiclip Interlock System. Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement Typical Home

5 B. Acceptable product: #280 S.I.S. Dub'l Loop-LokÔ Ladder Seismiclip Interlock System. C. Components: (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) 1. Truss-type horizontal joint reinforcement for concrete masonry unit walls: a. Acceptable product: #180 S.I.S. Dub'l Loop-Lok Truss. 2. Ladder-type horizontal joint reinforcement for concrete masonry unit walls: a. Acceptable product: #280 S.I.S. Dub'l Loop-Lok Ladder. (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) b. Side rods: 9 gage. c. Side rods: 3/16 inch diameter. (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) d. Cross rods: 9 gage. e. Cross rods: 3/16 inch diameter. f. Side rod spacing: 2 inches less than nominal concrete masonry unit width. (First of following two paragraphs specifies truss-type reinforcement; second paragraph specifies ladder-type. Delete one of the two paragraphs below.) g. Cross rod spacing: Truss type full width of side rod spacing, butt-welded to side rods at each contact point. Typical Home Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement

6 h. Cross rod spacing: 16 inches on center, butt-welded to side rods at each contact point. i. Double 3/16 inch diameter welded wire loops, spaced at 16 inches on center; inside loop dimension to provide 1-1/4 inches vertical adjustment of masonry anchor. (Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI requirements.) j. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 304. k. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2. (Delete one of two types of masonry ties below.) 3. Masonry wall tie: a. Acceptable product: Box Byna-tie. b. Rectangular-shape brick anchor, 3/16 inch diameter wire, fitting into wire loops of horizontal joint reinforcement. (Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI requirements.) c. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 304. d. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 316. e. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2 f. Length: Required for indicated wall cavity dimension. (Delete paragraph below if cavity drip not required.) Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement Typical Home

7 g. Deform wall tie to provide cavity drip at center of tie length. 4. Masonry wall tie: a. Acceptable product: Bent-Box Byna-tie. b. Rectangular-shape brick anchor, 3/16 inch diameter wire, fitting into wire loops of horizontal joint reinforcement, bent to form 1 inch offset, providing additional 1 inch of vertical coursing adjustment. c. Projection: Required for indicated wall cavity dimension. (Delete paragraph below if cavity drip not required.) d. Deform wall tie to provide cavity drip. (Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI requirements.) e. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 304. f. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2. 5. Reinforcement retaining clip: a. Acceptable product: #187-A Seismiclip. b. Extruded rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC), with one retaining ridge to secure 9 gage wire and three retaining ridges to secure 3/16 inch diameter wire, grooved base for improved mortar bond. Typical Home Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement

8 6. Joint reinforcement wire: (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) a. Wire size: 9 gage. b. Wire size: 3/16 inch diameter. (Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI requirements.) c. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 304. d. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2. e. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, mill galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 641, Class 3. f. Length 10 feet minimum continuous piece length. (Delete paragraph below if no rigid cavity insulation.) 7. Rigid insulation retainer: a. Acceptable product: Loop-Lok Washer. b. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) clip-type retainer for rigid board insulation; attaches to loop wires on horizontal joint reinforcement. (Article below specifies reinforcement systems for multi-wythe walls having aligning horizontal mortar joints, where restriction of vertical movement is required.) Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement Typical Home

9 2.3 ADJUSTBABLE REINFORCEMENTS SYTEMS (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) A. Acceptable product: #175 S.I.S. Dub'l Eye LokÔ Truss Seismiclip Interlock System. B. Acceptable product: #275 S.I.S. Dub'l Eye LokÔ Ladder Seismiclip Interlock System. C. Components: (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) 1. Truss-type horizontal joint reinforcement for concrete masonry unit walls: a. Acceptable product: #175 Dub'l Eye-Lok Truss. 2. Ladder-type horizontal joint reinforcement for concrete masonry unit walls: a. Acceptable product: #275 Dub'l Eye-Lok Ladder. (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) b. Side rods: 9 gage. c. Side rods: 3/16 inch diameter. (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) d. Cross rods: 9 gage. e. Cross rods: 3/16 inch diameter. f. Side rod spacing: 2 inches less than nominal concrete masonry unit width. Typical Home Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement

10 (First of following two paragraphs specifies truss-type reinforcement; second paragraph specifies ladder-type. Delete one of the two paragraphs below.) g. Cross rod spacing: Truss type full width of side rod spacing, butt-welded to side rods at each contact point. h. Cross rod spacing: 16 inches on center, butt-welded to side rods at each contact point. i. Double 3/16 inch diameter welded wire eyes, spaced at 16 inches on center. (Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI requirements.) j. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 304. k. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2. 3. Masonry wall tie: a. Acceptable product: Box Byna-tie. b. Rectangular-shape brick anchor, 3/16 inch diameter wire, fitting into wire eyes of horizontal joint reinforcement. (Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI requirements.) c. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 304. d. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2. e. Length: Required for indication wall cavity dimension. Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement Typical Home

11 (Delete paragraph below if cavity drip not required.) f. Deform wall tie to provide cavity drip. 4. Reinforcement retaining clip: a. Acceptable product: #187-A Seismiclip. b. Extruded rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC), with one retaining ridge to secure 9 gage wire and three retaining ridges to secure 3/16 inch diameter wire, grooved base for improved mortar bond. 5. Joint reinforcement wire: (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) a. Wire size: 9 gage. b. Wire size: 3/16 inch diameter. (Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI requirements.) c. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 304. d. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2. e. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, mill galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 641, Class 3. f. Length: 10 feet minimum continuous piece length. (Delete paragraph below if no rigid cavity insulation.) Typical Home Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement

12 6. Rigid insulation retainer: a. Acceptable product: Loop-Lok Washer. b. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) clip-type retainer for rigid board insulation; attaches to eye wires on horizontal joint reinforcement. (Article below specifies anchoring system for metal stud and sheathing substrate, with or without cavity insulation.) 2.40 MASONRY VENEER REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM A. Acceptable product: DW-10-X Seismiclip Interlock System. B. Components: 1. Formed metal veneer anchor having double-pointed legs to penetrate rigid insulation and sheathing for direct contact with steel stud framing, formed vertical slot for adjustable masonry wire ties, screw attachment to framing. a. Acceptable product: DW-10-X Veneer Anchor. (Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI requirements.) b. Metal: stainless steel sheet, ASTM A 167, Type 304, finish 2B. c. Metal: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 366, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2. d. Metal: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 366, mill galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Class G60. (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement Typical Home

13 e. Metal thickness: 14 gage. f. Metal thickness: 12 gage. (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) g. Screw hole size: 1/4 inch diameter. h. Screw hole size: 5/16 inch diameter. i. Leg lengths: Sizes for indicated sheathing and insulation thicknesses. 2. Masonry wall tie: a. Acceptable product: Byna-tie. b. Trapezoid-shape brick tie, fitting into vertical slot of veneer anchor. (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) c. Wire size: 3/16 inch diameter. d. Wire size: 1/4 inch diameter. (Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI requirements.) e. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 304. f. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2. g. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, mill galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 641. Typical Home Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement

14 h. Length: Required for indicated wall cavity dimension. (Delete paragraph below if cavity drip not required.) i. Deform wall tie to provide cavity drip. (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) 3. Reinforcement retaining clip: a. Acceptable product: #187 Seismiclip. b. Extruded rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC), with one retaining ridge to secure 9 gage continuous wire and three retaining ridges to secure alternate 3/16 inch diameter continuous wire and 3/16 inch diameter Byna-tie, grooved base for improved mortar bond. 4. Reinforcement retaining clip: a. Acceptable product: #250 Seismiclip. b. Extruded rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC), with one retaining ridge to secure 9 gage continuous wire, one retaining ridge to secure alternate 3/16 inch continuous wire and two retaining ridges to secure 1/4 inch diameter Byna-tie, grooved base for improved mortar bond. 5. Joint reinforcement wire: (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) a. Wire size: 9 gage. Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement Typical Home

15 b. Wire size: 3/16 diameter. (Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI requirements.) c. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 304. d. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2. e. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, mill galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 641, Class 3. f. Length: 10 feet minimum continuous piece length. (Delete paragraph below if not required for project.) 6. Sealing tape: a. Acceptable product: Textroseal. b. Meet requirements of ASTM D 412 and ASTM E 96. c. 40 mil thick multi-ply polyethylene/polymer modified asphalt, self-sealing; adhesive backed, 2-1/2 inches wide, 50 feel roll length. (Delete one of two fastener types below.) 7. Fasteners: a. Self-drilling self-tapping screws; hex washer head, size #10-16, lengths required for indicated insulation and sheathing thicknesses. b. Metal: Zinc-coated steel. c. Metal: Polymer-coated steel. Typical Home Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement

16 d. Metal: Stainless steel, Type Fasteners: a. Self-drilling self-tapping screws; hex washer head, size #12, lengths required for indicated insulation and sheathing thicknesses. b. Acceptable product: SX Fastener stainless steel Type 300, manufactured by SFS Stadler. c. Metal: Stainless steel shank, carbon steel point. (Delete paragraph below if not required for project.) d. Provide neoprene sealing washers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine project conditions before beginning installation of masonry reinforcement systems components. B. Do not proceed with installation of vinyl products until unacceptable conditions have been corrected INSTALLATION A. Concrete unit masonry installation is specified in Section B. Brick masonry installation is specified in Section C. Install masonry reinforcement system components in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. D. Adjustable Reinforcement System: 1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement for concrete unit masonry walls at 16 inches OC vertically and at masonry course above headers of openings, extending reinforcement minimum 8 inches past opening at each jamb. Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement Typical Home

17 (Delete paragraph below if no rigid board insulation.) 2. Secure rigid insulation in place with rigid insulation retainer at each masonry wall tie connector location on horizontal joint reinforcement. 3. Install masonry wall tie at each masonry wall tie connector location on horizontal joint reinforcement; install ties as exterior wythe of masonry construction progresses. 4. Set reinforcement retaining clip in full mortar bed at each masonry wall tie location; secure tie wires in correct size ridges. 5. Secure continuous masonry joint reinforcement wire in correct size ridge in reinforcement retaining clip. E. Masonry Veneer Reinforcement System: (Delete paragraph below if sealing tape not specified in Part 2.) 1. Install sealing tape at stud locations to receive veneer anchors; install tape vertically, continuous full stud length. 2. Install veneer anchors at stud locations; 16 inches OC vertically, 16 inches OC horizontally. 3. Screw-attach veneer anchor to stud face; ensure full contact of veneer anchor legs with stud face. 4. Install masonry wall tie at each veneer anchor location; install ties as exterior wythe of masonry construction progresses. 5. Set reinforcement retaining clip in full mortar bed at each masonry wall tie location; secure tie wires in correct size ridges. 6. Secure continuous masonry joint reinforcement wire in correct size ridge in reinforcement retaining clip. END OF SECTION Typical Home Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement

18 SAWN THIN VENEER STONE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section includes thin cut veneer masonry construction of natural stone set in cement mortar over a structural wall backing of: 1. Plywood sheathing. 2. Concrete masonry. 3. Metal building. 4. Other. B. Section includes special decorative sawn thin veneer stone shapes for trim. C. Section includes installation of built-in accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete Foundations. B. Section Unit Masonry Assemblies: Masonry supporting wall. C. Section Metal Fabrications: Shelf angles, structural supports, anchors and other built-in components for building into stone veneer masonry by this section. D. Section Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Formed steel framed supporting wall. E. Section Framing and Sheathing: Wood frame supporting wall. F. Section Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. G. Section Joint Sealers: Sealant for perimeter and control joints. H. Section Cement Plaster: Metal lath and scratch coat back-up over supporting walls. I. Section Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement. B. ASTM C 97 - Standard Specification for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Dimension Stone. C. ASTM C 99 - Standard Specification for Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone. D. ASTM C Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. E. ASTM C Standard Specification for Portland Cement. F. ASTM C Standard Specification for Compressive Strength of Dimension Stone. Typical Home Veneer Stone

19 G. ASTM C Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. H. ASTM C Mortar for Unit Masonry. I. ASTM C 615 Standard Specifications for Granite Dimension Stone J. ASTM C Standard Specification for Quartz-Based Dimension Stone. K. ASTM C Preconstruction Evaluation of Mortar for Plain & Reinforced Masonry. L. ASTM C Standard Specification for Metal Lath. M. ASTM C Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster. N. ASTM D Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. O. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. P. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS Specifications for Masonry Structures. Q. PCA - Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) Manual 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section B. Product Data: Quarrier or natural stone data sheets on stone and mortar mix to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Cleaning methods. C. Design Data: Submit design mix when Property specification of ASTM C270 is to be used, with required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations. D. Selection Samples: For each stone product specified, submit two samples, minimum size 48 (1216 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and texture. E. Samples: Submit samples of mortar representing actual mortar color and color range. F. Quarrier's Certificate: Certify stone properties and mortar mix will conform to specified requirements. G. Construct sample panel at location indicated or directed, and as follows: 1. Recommended Size: 8-0 x 8-0 (2.4 m by 2.4 m) or a size that satisfies the architect. This size should be no less than 4-0 x 4-0 (1.2 m by 1.2 M). 2. Include all stone unit types and sizes to be used including a typical corner condition, special shapes and mortar joint treatment. Clean the sample panel using the same materials and tools as planned for the final stone masonry construction. 3. Obtain architect's acceptance of sample panel before beginning construction activities of this section. 4. Do not remove sample panel until construction activities of this section have been accepted by the Architect. Typical Home Veneer Stone

20 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Stone Quarrier: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Stone Masonry Company: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preconstruction Meetings: Conduct preconstruction meetings including the Architect, Contractor, stone masonry subcontractor, and the flashing subcontractor to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions and other requirements. Comply with Division 1 requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products on pallets, under cover and in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store stone materials on pallets on a dry level surface. Pallets shall not be stacked and shall be covered with tarps. C. Store mortar under cover and in an area where temperature is maintained between 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) to 43 degrees C (110 degrees F). 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Hot and Cold Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 Specifications for Masonry Structures. B. Ambient temperature shall be 40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C) or above during erection of stone masonry. When ambient temperature falls below 50 degrees F, mortar mixing water shall be heated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Stone Quarrier:, Krukowski Stone Co., Inc., 3781 County Rd. C, Mosinee, Wisconsin 54455, ASD, Phone: , Toll free: , Fax: , Internet: B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section VENEER STONE A. General: All natural stone sawn veneers shall vary in depth ¾ to 1 ½ inches (19 mm to 38 mm) plus or minus ½ inch (12.5 mm), heights of 3-8 (76 to 203 mm), or higher where indicated and is furnished in random lengths from 6-30 (203 mm to 762 mm). B. Quartzite Sandstone Blends: Quartzite sandstone blends thin veneers vary in depth ¾ to 1 ½ (+/- ½ ) in depth. The lengths vary from 6 to 30 inches (203 to 762 mm). Typical Home Veneer Stone

21 1. Properties: a. Material Type: Quartzitic Sandstone b. Material Class: Metamorphic c. Dry Density: pcf d. Bulk Specific Gravity: 2.54 e. Absorption: 0.5 percent f. Modulus of Rupture: 1,850 psi g. Compressive Strength: 17,700 psi h. Freeze-Thaw Weight Loss: < 0.5 percent i. Abrasion Resistance: 63.8 j. Mohs Hardness: Sandy Creek Shades of buff & tan, may contain little to strong tan and crimson veining. In most products the top and the bottom of the Sandy Creek stone is the natural bed height and therefore a darker brown color. a. Sandy Creek Ledgerock Veneer Shades of buff & tan may contain little to strong tan or crimson veining. 100% Split-Face, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 1-3 Heights, 8-20 Lengths b. Sandy Creek Shades of buff & tan may contain little to strong tan or crimson veining. 100% Split-Face, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 3-8 Heights, 6-30 Lengths c. Sandy Creek Jumpers Shades of buff & tan may contain little to strong tan or crimson veining. 100% Split-Face, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), Heights, Random lengths d. Sandy Creek Kings Blend Shades of buff & tan may contain little to strong tan or crimson veining. 100% Split-Face, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 3-8 Heights, Lengths e. Sandy Creek Sawn Heights Shades of buff & tan may contain little to strong tan or crimson veining. 100% Split-Face, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 2 ¼, 3½, 5, 7½, & 7 ¾ Sawn Heights (+/- ¼ ), 6-30 Lengths 3. Highland Brown Variations of brown tones, consisting of light tan, auburn, cedar, dark brown. Naturally Weathered, Seam Face and/or Bed Face material a. Highland Brown Antique Variations of brown tones, consisting of light tan, auburn, cedar, dark brown. Seam face and/or bed face, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 3-8 Heights, 6-30 Lengths b. Highland Brown Antique Jumpers Variations of brown tones, consisting of light tan, auburn, cedar, dark brown. Seam face and/or bed face, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), Heights Random lengths c. Highland Brown Kings Blend Variations of brown tones, consisting of light tan, auburn, cedar, dark brown. Seam face and/or bed face ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 3-8 Heights, Lengths d. Highland Brown Webwall Variations of brown tones, consisting of light tan, auburn, cedar, dark brown. Bed-face, Irregular Shapes, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 4-12 Diameter e. Highland Brown Palace Blend Variations of brown tones, consisting of light tan, auburn, cedar, dark brown. Bed-face, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 4, 6, & 8 Snapped Heights Typical Home Veneer Stone

22 (+/- ¼ ),6-30 Lengths f. Highland Brown Sawn Heights Variations of brown tones, consisting of light tan, auburn, cedar, dark brown. Seam face and/or bed face, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 2 ¼, 3½, 5, 7½, & 7 ¾ (+/- ¼ ) Sawn Heights, 6-30 Lengths 4. Glacier Bay Antiqued tumbled texture, shades of buff, tan, & variations of brown. a. Glacier Bay Ashlar Antiqued, tumbled texture, shades of buff & tan. Darker tones can be achieved by laying pieces bed-face out. ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 3-8 Heights, Lengths b. Glacier Bay Fortress Blend - Rectangular Antiqued tumbled split face and or bed-face texture, shades of buff, tan, & variations of brown. ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 4 x 6 to 8 x 10 Square & Rectangular shaped pieces. c. Glacier Bay Fortress Blend - Irregular Antiqued tumbled split face and or bed-face texture, shades of buff, tan, & variations of brown. ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 4 x 6 to 8 x 10 Irregular shaped pieces d. Glacier Bay Palace Blend Antiqued, tumbled texture, shades of buff, tan, & variations of brown. ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 4, 6, & 8 Snapped Heights, 5-20 Lengths e. Glacier Bay Fieldstone Antiqued tumbled bed-face texture, shades of buff, tan, & variations of brown. Irregular Webwall Contour, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 4-12 Diameter f. Glacier Bay Sawn Heights Antiqued tumbled (split-face) texture, shades of light buff. ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 2 ¼, 3½, 5, 7½, & 7 ¾ (+/- ¼ ), Sawn Heights, Lengths 5. Chestnut - Medium to dark brown, chocolate and coffee brown tones a. Chestnut Ashlar Medium to dark brown, chocolate and coffee brown tones Weathered edge and bed face, natural and snapped heights, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 3-10 Heights 6-24 Lengths b. Chestnut Boulders Can have large variations in coloring ranging from medium to dark chocolate and coffee brown tones. 100% Bed-Face, Irregular Shapes, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 4-12 Diameter c. Chestnut Palace Blend Medium to dark brown, chocolate & coffee brown tones 100% Bed-Face, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 4, 6, & 8 Snapped Heights, Lengths 6. Apple Creek Light to significant horizontal veining consisting of buff, mauve, & crimson colorations. a. Apple Creek Light to significant horizontal veining consisting of buff, mauve, and crimson colorations. 100% Split-Face, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 2-6 Heights 6-30 Lengths b. Apple Creek Ledgerock Light to significant horizontal veining consisting of buff, mauve, & Typical Home Veneer Stone

23 crimson colorations. 100% Split-Face, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 1 ½ -4 Heights 6-30 Lengths 7. Architectural Blends a. Desert Blend A blend of: 50% Sandy Creek, 50% Highland Brown ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 3-8 Heights 6-30 Lengths b. Desert Blend Sawn Heights A blend of: 50% Sandy Creek, 50% Highland Brown ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 2 ¼, 3 ½, 5, 7 ½, & 7 ¾ (+/- ¼ ) Sawn Heights, 6-30 Lengths c. Church Blend A blend of: 50% Sandy Creek, 50% Apple Creek ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 2-8 Heights Lengths d. Church Blend Ledgerock A blend of: 50% Sandy Creek Ledgerock, 50% Apple Creek Ledgerock ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 1-4 Heights 6-30 Lengths e. Cambrian Blend A blend of: 40% Sandy Creek, 40% Highland Brown, 20% Chestnut Boulder ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 3-8 Heights, 6-30 Lengths 3-10 Diameters f. Cambrian Blend Ashlar A blend of: 40% Sandy Creek, 40% Highland Brown, 20% Chestnut Ashlar ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 3-8 Heights 6-30 Lengths g. Autumn Sunburst A blend of: 60% Highland Brown, 40% Chestnut Boulder ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 3-8 Heights, 6-30 Lengths 4-12 Diameters h. Autumn Sunburst Ashlar A blend of: 60% Highland Brown, 40% Chestnut Ashlar ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 3-8 Heights 6-30 Lengths i. Autumn Sunburst Palace Blend A blend of: 60% Highland Brown Palace Blend, 40% Chestnut Palace Blend ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 4, 6, & 8 Snapped Heights, 6-30 Lengths j. Northridge Blend A blend of: 50% Highland Brown Webwall, 50% Chestnut Boulder ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 4-12 Diameters k. Omega Blend A blend of: 70% Highland Brown, 30% Sandy Creek ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 4, 6, & 8 Snapped Heights 6-30 Lengths l. Prairie House A blend of: 70% Sandy Creek, 30% Highland Brown ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 2-8 Heights, 6-20 Lengths, Rustic ends C. Granitic Gneiss Blends: Granitic gneiss blends including Aqua Blue and Aqua Grantique. Aqua Blue veneer is a natural freeform rustic stone 7-10 irregular diameter material in ¾ to 1 ½ (+/- ½ ) bed depth. The Aqua Grantique is a sawn height veneer either 3 ½ or 7 ½ (89 or 191 mm) in height then sawn ¾ to 1 ½ (+/- ½ ) bed depth and random lengths of 6 30 (203 to 762 mm). Typical Home Veneer Stone

24 1. Properties: a. Material Type: Granitic Gneiss b. Material Class: Metamorphic c. Dry Density: pcf d. Bulk Specific Gravity: 3.03 e. Absorption: 0.0 percent f. Modulus of Rupture: 2,910 psi g. Compressive Strength: 22,710 psi h. Freeze-Thaw Weight Loss: < 0.5 percent i. Mohs Hardness: 7 2. Aqua Grantique Rustic weathered, dark blue/charcoal blue, with occasional rust coloring, also containing white quartz and green veining. a. Aqua Blue Boulder Rustic weathered, dark blue stone may contain rust coloring, white quartz or green veining. ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), Irregular Shapes, 4-12 Diameters b. Aqua Grantique Sawn Height Veneer Dark charcoal blue/black may contain rust coloring, white quartz or green veining. 100% Split-Face, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 2 ¼, 3½, 5, 7½, & 7 ¾ (+/- ¼ ) Sawn Heights, Lengths c. Aqua Grantique Tumbled Sawn Height Veneer Antiqued tumbled, charcoal blue/black, may contain rust coloring, white quartz or green veining. 100% Split-Face, Tumbled Texture, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 2 ¼, 3½, 5, 7½, & 7 ¾ (+/- ¼ ) Sawn Heights, 5-20 Lengths 3. Architectural Blends a. St. Mary s Blend A blend of: 50% Aqua Blue Boulder, 50% Split Wausau Red Irregular shape, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 4-12 Diameter D. Quartzitic Sandstone: Quartzitic sandstone is a sawn height veneer 3.5 inches and 7.5 inches (89 to 191 mm) snapped face. 1. Properties: a. Material Type: Quartzitic Sandstone b. Material Class: Metamorphic c. Dry Density: pcf. d. Bulk Specific Gravity: 2.34 e. Absorption: 2.2 percent f. Modulus of Rupture: 1,765 psi g. Compressive Strength: 15,860 psi h. Freeze-Thaw Weight Loss: <0.5 percent i. Mohs Hardness: Carmel Cream Extreme color variations from light buff, tan, burgundy, or terracotta; contains light to excessive veining and swirls of dark brown, burgundy or rust. a. Carmel Cream Sawn Heights Extreme color variations from light buff, tan, burgundy or terracotta; contains light to excessive veining and swirls of dark brown, burgundy or rust. 100% Split-Face, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 2 ¼, 3½, 5, 7½, & 7 ¾ (+/- ¼ ) Sawn Heights, Lengths b. Carmel Cream Tumbled Sawn Heights Typical Home Veneer Stone

25 Antiqued tumbled texture, extreme color variations from light buff, tan, burgundy or terracotta; contains light to excessive veining and swirls of dark brown, burgundy or rust. 100% Split-Face, Tumbled Texture, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 2 ¼, 3½, 5, 7½, & 7 ¾ (+/- ¼ ) Sawn Heights, 5-20 Lengths E. Wisconsin Granite Reds, pinks, grays, blues, burgundy, blacks & peppered 1. Wisconsin Granite Cobbles Reds, pinks, grays, blues, burgundy, blacks & peppered ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 4-12 Diameters 2. Wisconsin Split Fieldstone Reds, pinks, grays, blues, burgundy, blacks & peppered 100% Split-Face, ¾ to 1 ½ Depth (+/- ½ ), 4-12 Diameters *Please note: All of our materials are products of nature and therefore colors, veining, & character will vary from stone to stone. This is especially true with the Carmel Cream material. Handy packs of flats are limited to 22 lengths. Handy pack corners are limited to 8 linear feet in corners per box. 2.3 SPECIAL SHAPES A. Provide special sawn veneer shapes as indicated on the Drawings and as follows: 1. Quoins 2. Keystones 3. Edge stones 4. Cornerstones 5. Sills 6. Ledges 7. Medallions 8. Other. B. Stone shall be furnished in sizes indicated plus or minus 1/2 inch (12.5 mm). Material shall conform to C 616 for Quartzite Sandstone with the following properties: 1. Maximum absorption rate of 0.5 percent average when tested in accordance with ASTM C Average dry density of 158 lb per CF (2530 kg/m3) when tested in accordance with ASTM C Average compressive strength of 17,000 psi (122 Mpa) when tested in accordance with ASTM C Average modules of rupture 1,800 psi (12 Mpa) when tested in accordance with ASTM C99. C. Color shall be: 1. Match the veneer stone ACCESSORIES A. Expanded Metal Lath Paper Backed: ASTM C847; galvanized, self furring mesh of weight to suit application; backed with paper. B. Expanded Metal Lath: ASTM C847, galvanized, self-furring, minimum 2.5 lb or 18 gauge. C. Anchorage: Tie wire, nails, screws and other metal supports, galvanized, of type and size to suit application and to rigidly secure materials in place. D. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1, No. 15 asphalt saturated felt. E. Concrete Bonding Agent: Thorobond water-based polyvinyl acetate type as approved by the Typical Home Veneer Stone

26 stone quarrier. F. Setting buttons or shims: Lead or plastic 2.5 MORTAR A. Masonry Cement: Complying with ASTM C91: 1. Type N. 2. Color, gray. 3. Color, white or colored is optional. 4. Color. B. Portland Cement: Complying with ASTM C150: 1. Type I. 2. Type. 3. Color, gray. 4. Color, white or colored is optional. 5. Color. C. Mortar Aggregate: Complying with ASTM C144, standard masonry type. D. Hydrated Lime: Complying with ASTM C207: 1. Type S. 2. Type SA. E. Water: Clean and potable. 2.6 MIXES A. Mortar Mixes: 1. Mortar for Structural Masonry: Complying with ASTM C270, using Proportion Specification. a. Type N. B. Mortar Mixing: 1. Mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270. Mix only in quantities needed for immediate use. 2. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower freezing point of mortar. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until backing structure is plumb, bearing surfaces are level and substrates are clean and properly prepared. B. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into stone masonry. C. Notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OVER PLYWOOD SHEATHING A. Cover sheathing with waterproof building paper with all joints lapped shingle style a minimum of 4 inches (102 mm). B. Install metal lath in accordance with ASTM C1063. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports. Lap ends minimum 1 inch (25 mm) Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports. Typical Home Veneer Stone

27 C. Attach metal lath to wood supports using galvanized nails atmaximum6 inches (152 mm) on center vertically and 16 inches (406 mm) on center horizontally. Fasten with a minimum of a 1 inch (25 mm) penetration of the wood studs. Stop lath 1 inch (25 mm) from finished edges. D. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh. E. Place lath vertically above each top corner and each side of door and glazed frames. 3.3 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OVER CONCRETE OR CONCRETE MASONRY A. Clean or sandblast concrete masonry to assure a proper mortar bond. Verify no bituminous, water repellent, or form release agents exist on concrete surface that are detrimental to mortar bond. B. Apply bonding agent in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions. C. Install metal lath in accordance with ASTM C1063. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports. Lap ends minimum 1 inch (25 mm)secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports. D. Attach metal lath to concrete using galvanized concrete nails at maximum 6 inches (152 mm) on center vertically and 16 inches (406 mm) on center horizontally. Stop lath 1 inch (25 mm) from finished edges. E. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh. F. Place lath vertically above each top corner and each side of door and glazed frames. 3.4 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OVER METAL SIDING OR OPEN STUD A. Install paperbacked metal lath in accordance with ASTM C1063. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports. Lap ends minimum 1 inch (25 mm)secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports. B. Attach metal lath to support members using galvanized 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) type S-12 Panhead Super Tight Screws as manufactured by United States Gypsum. Screws shall penetrate a minimum of 3/8 inch ( cm) into the metal siding support members. Provide 1 fastener per SF of surface area and do not exceed 6 inches (152 mm) on center in any one direction. C. Place minimum 4 inch (100 mm) wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing materials. Secure rigidly in place. D. Place lath vertically above each top corner and each side of door and glazed frames. E. Apply scratch coat in accordance with PCA Plaster (Stucco) Manual. F. Apply scratch coat to nominal thickness of1/2 to 3/4 inch (12.5 to 19 mm) over metal lath surfaces. G. Moist cure scratch coat for minimum period of 48 hours. H. After curing, dampen previous coat prior to applying mortar and thin stone veneer. 3.5 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OF THIN VENEER STONE A. Stone must be water saturated, surface-dry when placed. Water down the stone 24 hours Typical Home Veneer Stone

28 prior to placement until saturated. Reapply water to keep stone saturated as required by weather conditions. B. Coordinate placement of reinforcement, anchors and accessories, flashings and other moisture control products supplied by other sections. C. Clean all built-in items of loose rust, ice, mud, or other foreign matter before incorporating into the wall. All ferrous metal built into the wall shall be primed or galvanized. D. If required, provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain bracing in place until building structure provides permanent support. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF THIN VENEER STONE A. Install thin veneer stone and mortar in accordance with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 Specifications for Masonry Structures. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension(s). Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Pattern Bond: 1. Lay stone with the bed-face, split-face or weather edge exposed, as material is described in stone veneer section 2.2. Take care to avoid a concentration of any one color to any one wall surface. 2. Maintain an approximate 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) joint, as stone allows. 3. Do not use stacked vertical joints. 4. Lay out work in advance and distribute color range of stone uniformly over total work area. D. Placing and Bonding: 1. Dampen substrate as required to reduce excessive suction. 2. Apply mortar in accordance with PCA Plaster (Stucco) Manual to a thickness of 1/2 to 3/4 inch (12.5 mm to 19 mm) Do not spread more than a workable area of 5 to 10 SF (.46 to.93 SM) so that mortar will not set before stone is applied. 3. Lay thin veneer stone in a full bed of mortar with full head joints. 4. Work from the bottom up laying corner pieces first. 5. Remove excessive mortar as work progresses. 6. Do not shift or tap veneer stone after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment is required, remove mortar and replace. 7. Isolate top of veneer stone from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler and sealant in accordance with Section E. Joining Work: Where fresh masonry joints partially set masonry. 1. Remove loose stone and mortar. 2. Clean and lightly wet surface of set masonry. 3. To avoid a horizontal run of masonry rack back 1/2 (12.5 mm) the length of stone in each course. 4. Toothing is not permitted. F. Joints: 1. Lay stone with an approximate 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) mortar joint, as stone allows. 2. Tool joints when "thumb-print" hard with a round jointer slightly larger than the width of the joint. 3. Trowel-point or concave tool exterior joints below grade. 4. Flush cut joints to be finished with a soft brush only. 5. Retempering of mortar is not permitted. 6. Use non-corrosive stone shims as required to maintain uniform joint thickness. Typical Home Veneer Stone

29 G. Flashing: 1. Clean surface of masonry smooth and remove any projections, which could damage flashings. 2. Place flashing on a bed of mortar. 3. Cover flashing with mortar. 4. Provide weep vents at head joints placed every 16 inches (406 mm) along the first course immediately above flashing or as recommended by weep vent manufacturer. H. Control and Expansion Joints: Keep joints open and free of debris. Coordinate control joint in accordance with Section for sealant performance. I. Sealant Recesses: Provide open joint 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep and 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide, where masonry meets doors, windows and other exterior openings. Coordinate sealant joints in accordance with Section for sealant performance. J. Cutting And Fitting: Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, grounds, and other penetrations and adjacent materials. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test mortar and grout in accordance with Section B. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C780, Annex A4, for mortar aggregate ratio and ASTM C 780, Annex A5, for mortar water content. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Cover the top of unfinished stone masonry work to protect it from the weather. C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 3.9 CLEANING A. Promptly remove excess wet mortar from the face of the stone as work progresses. Clean stone masonry with a stiff nylon brush and clean water only. See Krukowski Stone Co., Inc recommendations for cleaning of stonework if it is necessary to clean with chemicals. These recommendations are located at END OF SECTION Typical Home Veneer Stone

30 SECTION Clay Masonry Unit PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Clay masonry units and accessories including: 1. Brick units. 2. Anchors and ties. 3. Expansion joints. 4. Flashing. 5. Reinforcement. 6. Mortar. 7. Cleaning. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Cast-In-Place Concrete. B. Section Grout. C. Section Concrete Unit Masonry. D. Section Structural Steel. E. Section Cold Formed Metal Framing. F. Section Metal Fabrications. G. Section Rough Carpentry. H. Section Waterproofing. I. Section Insulation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. B. ASTM A 82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. C. ASTM A Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. D. ASTM A Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. E. ASTM A Standard Specification for Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. F. ASTM A Standard Specification for Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. Typical Home Clay Masonry Unit

31 G. ASTM A Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. H. ASTM A Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars. I. ASTM A996 - Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. J. ASTM B Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. K. ASTM C 67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. L. ASTM C Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). M. ASTM C Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. N. ASTM C Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). O. ASTM C Standard Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made from Clay or Shale. P. ASTM D Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular MaterialsSponge or Expanded Rubber. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Samples: Furnish not less than five individual brick as samples, showing extreme variations in color and texture. D. Sample Panel: Mock-up or sample panels shall be used to review brick and mortar color and serve as the standard of workmanship for the Project. 1. Approximately 4 feet (1.2 m) long by 3 feet (1 m) high, showing the proposed color range, texture, bond, mortar and workmanship. All brick shipped for the sample shall be included in the panel. 2. When required, provide a separate panel for each type of brick or mortar. 3. Do not start work until Architect/Engineer has accepted sample panel. 4. Use panel as standard of comparison for all masonry work built of same material. 5. Do not destroy or move panel until work is completed and accepted by Architect. 1.5 HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store brick off the ground to prevent contamination by mud, dust or other materials likely to cause staining or other defects. Typical Home Clay Masonry Unit

32 C. Cover all materials with a nonstaining waterproof membrane material when necessary to protect from elements. D. Store different types of materials separately. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Work: 1. Wall Covering: a. During erection, cover top of wall with strong nonstaining waterproof membrane at end of each day or shutdown. b. Cover partially completed walls when work is not in progress. c. Extend cover minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) down both sides. d. Hold cover securely in place. 2. Load Applications: a. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry columns or wall. b. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry columns or walls. 3. Stain Prevention: a. Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry. b. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with face of such masonry. c. Protect all sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar. d. Protect base of wall from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter. e. Scaffold boards shall be turned on edge when work is not in progress. B. Cold Weather Protection: 1. Preparation: a. When ice or snow has formed on masonry bed, remove by carefully applying heat not to exceed 120 degrees F (49 degrees C) until surface is dry to the touch. b. Remove all masonry deemed frozen or damaged. 2. Products: a. When brick suction exceeds BIA reference standard, sprinkle with heated water: 1) When units are above 32 degrees F (0 degrees C), heat water above 70 degrees F (21 degrees C). 2) When units are below 32 degrees F (0 degrees C), heat water above 130 degrees F (54 degrees C). b. Use dry masonry units. c. Do not use wet or frozen units. 3. Construction Requirements While Work is Progressing: a. Air temperature 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0 degrees C): 1) Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0 degrees C). b. Air temperature 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C): 1) Heat sand and mixing water to produce temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees C). 2) Maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. c. Air temperatures 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C) to 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C). 1) Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures Typical Home Clay Masonry Unit

33 between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F. (49 degrees C). 2) Maintain mortar temperatures on boards above freezing. 3) Use salamanders or other heat sources on both sides of walls under construction. 4) Use windbreaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph (24 kms/h). d. Air temperature 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) and below: 1) Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees C.). 2) Provide enclosures and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32 degrees F (0 degrees C). 3) Minimum temperature of units when laid: 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C). 4. Protection requirements for completed masonry and masonry not being worked on: a. Mean daily air temperature 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0 degrees C): 1) Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours by covering with weather-resistive membrane. b. Mean daily air temperature 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C): 1) Completely cover masonry with weather-resistive membrane for 24 hrs. c. Mean daily temperature 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C) to 20 degrees F (- 7 degrees C): 1) Completely cover masonry with insulating blankets or equal protection for 24 hours. d. Mean daily air temperature 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) and below: 1) Maintain masonry temperature above 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) for 24 hours by: a) Method: Enclosure and supplementary heat. b) Method: Electric heating blankets. c) Method: Infrared lamps. d) Method: Other approved methods. C. Hot Weather Protection: 1. When temperature exceeds 100 degrees F or 90 degrees F with 8 mph wind (above 38 degrees C or 32 degrees C with 13 kms/h wind). a. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout between 70 degrees F and 120 degrees F (21 degrees C and 49 degrees C). 1) Limit spread of mortar bed to 4 feet (1.2 m). Place units within 1 minute of spreading mortar. b. Partially or recently completed walls may be fog sprayed and/or covered with opaque plastic or canvas or both to control moisture evaporation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Belden Brick Company (The), which is located at: 700 W. Tuscarawas St. P. O. Box ; Canton, OH 44702; Tel: ; request info (info@beldenbrick.com); Web: B. Substitutions: Not permitted. Typical Home Clay Masonry Unit

34 C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section CLAY MASONRY UNITS A. All brick specified and shown on drawing shall be provided as Manufactured by The Belden Brick Company. 1. Facing Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, a. Type FBS. b. Type FBX. c. Type FBA. 2. Hollow Brick: ASTM C 652, Grade SW. a. Type HBS. b. Type HBX. c. Type HBA. 3. Thin Veneer Brick: ASTM C a. Grade Exterior. b. Grade Interior. c. Type FBS. d. Type FBX. e. Type FBA. B. Minimum Compressive Strength: by request C. Maximum Initial Rate of Absorption (IRA): by request D. Provide brick similar in texture, color and physical properties to those available for inspection at the Architect/Engineer's office and/or as supplied on the approved sample panel. E. Shapes: Special shapes are required to be used per architectural detail(s). F. All brick supplied shall be pre-blended by the manufacturer. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: 1. Billet Steel Deformed Bars: ASTM A Rail Steel Deformed Bars: ASTM A 616 or A Axle Steel Deformed Bars: ASTM A 617 or A Epoxy Coated Billet Steel: ASTM A 615 and ASTM A ANCHORS AND TIES A. Corrugated Ties: ASTM A 1008, 20 Gage, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2. B. Truss Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 82 (ASTM A 666), Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2. C. Ladder Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 82 (ASTM A 666), Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2. D. Wire Wall Ties: ASTM A 82, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2. E. Dovetail Anchors: ASTM A 1008, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2. F. Anchors: 1. Plate Bent Bar Anchors: ASTM A 36, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2. Typical Home Clay Masonry Unit

35 2.5 FLASHING 2. Plate Header Bar Anchors: ASTM A 36, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2. A. Copper: ASTM B 370, 5 oz. B. Copper: ASTM B 370, 7 oz. C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304. D. Plastic: PVC, 30 mil (0.75 mm) thick. 1. Thin PVC flashings are not generally recommended as a through wall. 2. Flashing because of their life expectancy. E. Combinations 1. Plastic/Copper: 5 oz. 2. Cooper/Fabric: 5 oz. 3. Asphalt-Coated Copper: 5 oz. 4. Plastic/Copper: 7 oz. 5. Cooper/Fabric: 7 oz. 6. Asphalt-Coated Copper: 7 oz. 2.6 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Premolded Foam: ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1. B. Neoprene: ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1. C. Backer Rod: Extruded, Closed Cell Polyethylene. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Weepholes: 1. Rope Wicks: Cotton Sash Cord, 12 inches long with end laid in cavity. 2. Plastic Tubes: 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum inside diameter by 4 inches (102 mm) long. 3. Aluminum Weep/Vents. 4. Plastic Weep/Vents. 2.8 MORTAR A. Mortar shall conform to ASTM C 270 under the guidelines provided in BIA Technical Notes #8 Series. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Cleaning Reinforcement: 1. Remove mud, loose rust, ice and other coatings from reinforcement which Typical Home Clay Masonry Unit

36 would interfere with bond. C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 BONDING A. Lay masonry in bond pattern as indicated on drawings or general notes. 1. Reference BIA Technical Note #30 for additional requirements. 3.5 LAYING MASONRY A. Lay masonry with full head and bed joints. B. Lay all brick plumb and true to lines. C. Where fresh mortar joins partially set mortar, remove loose brick and mortar, and lightly wet exposed surface of set masonry. D. Toothing shall be subject to approval by the Architect/Engineer. E. When adjustment is necessary to be made after mortar begins to harden, remove hardened mortar and replace with fresh mortar. 3.6 TOOLING AND POINTING A. Joint Profile: Tool mortar joints to a concave appearance. B. Joint Profile: Tool mortar joints to a concave V-shaped appearance. C. Joint Profile: Tool mortar joints to a concave grapevine appearance. D. Tool exposed joints when "thumb-print" hard. E. Flush cut all joints not tooled. F. When pointing, rake mortar joints to a depth of not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm). Fill solidly with pointing mortar. Tool joints. 3.7 FLASHING A. Clean surface of masonry from projections which might puncture flashing. B. Place through-wall flashing on bed of mortar. C. Cover flashing with mortar. D. Lap flashing a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm). E. Leave flashing project from face of wall approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) to form a drip. Flashing shall be cut back to the face of the wall after inspection, if the drip is deemed objectionable by Architect. 3.8 WEEPHOLES Typical Home Clay Masonry Unit

37 A. Provide weep holes in head joints of the first brick course immediately above flashing by placing weeps no more than 24 inches (610 mm) on center horizontally. B. Keep cavity free from mortar. 3.9 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Keep clean from all mortar and debris. B. Locate as shown on drawing. C. Install neoprene pre-molded foam pad. D. Install backer rod. E. Install sealant. Prime surfaces if necessary CLEANING A. Cut out all defective mortar joints and holes in exposed masonry and provide new mortar. B. Clean pre-selected sample wall area. Do not proceed with cleaning until approved by Architect. C. Clean brick as outlined in BIA Technical Notes 20 Revised II. D. All cleaning practices and product used shall be in accordance with cleaning products manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION Typical Home Clay Masonry Unit

38 Masonry Brick CLAY UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Clay masonry units and accessories including: 1. Brick units. 2. Anchors and ties. 3. Expansion joints. 4. Flashing. 5. Reinforcement. 6. Mortar. 7. Cleaning. 1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section Concrete for grout. B. Section Concrete Unit Masonry for concrete masonry units. C. Section Metal fabrications for lintels and shelf angles. D. Section Insulation for cavity insulation. E. Section Flashing and Sheet Metal for flashing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Cast-In-Place Concrete. B. Section Grout. C. Section Concrete Unit Masonry. D. Section Structural Steel. E. Section Cold Formed Metal Framing. F. Section Metal Fabrications. G. Section Rough Carpentry. Typical Home Masonry Brick

39 H. Section Waterproofing. I. Section Insulation. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. B. ASTM A 82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. C. ASTM A Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. D. ASTM A Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. E. ASTM A Standard Specification for Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. F. ASTM A Standard Specification for Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. G. ASTM A Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. H. ASTM A Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars. I. ASTM A996 - Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. J. ASTM B Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. K. ASTM C 67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. L. ASTM C Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). M. ASTM C Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. N. ASTM C Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). O. ASTM C Standard Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made from Clay or Shale. P. ASTM D Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular MaterialsSponge or Expanded Rubber. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Samples: Furnish not less than five individual brick as samples, showing extreme variations Typical Home Masonry Brick

40 in color and texture. D. Sample Panel: Mock-up or sample panels shall be used to review brick and mortar color and serve as the standard of workmanship for the Project. 1. Approximately 4 feet (1.2 m) long by 3 feet (1 m) high, showing the proposed color range, texture, bond, mortar and workmanship. All brick shipped for the sample shall be included in the panel. 2. When required, provide a separate panel for each type of brick or mortar. 3. Do not start work until Architect/Engineer has accepted sample panel. 4. Use panel as standard of comparison for all masonry work built of same material. 5. Do not destroy or move panel until work is completed and accepted by Architect. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: B. Installer Qualifications: C. Brick Tests: Sample and test shall be in accordance with ASTM C 67. D. Test Reports: 1. Testing and reports shall be completed by an independent laboratory. 2. Test reports for each type of building and facing brick shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. 3. Test reports shall indicate: a. Compressive strength. b. 24 hour cold water absorption. c. 5-hour boil absorption. d. Saturation coefficient. e. Initial rate of absorption. f. Efflorescence. E. Certificates: Prior to delivery, submit to Architect/Engineer certificates attesting compliance with the applicable specifications for grades, types or classes included in these specifications. F. Costs of Tests: Cost of tests shall be borne by the purchaser, unless tests indicate that units do not conform to the requirements of the specifications, in which case cost shall be borne by the seller. G. Prism Tests: Prism Tests shall be required when using engineered masonry ( (p'm) = psi). 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store brick off the ground to prevent contamination by mud, dust or other materials likely to cause staining or other defects. C. Cover all materials with a nonstaining waterproof membrane material when necessary to protect from elements. D. Store different types of materials separately. 1.8 ALLOWANCES A. Allowance includes purchase of brick, taxes, delivery and any special handling charges. Typical Home Masonry Brick

41 B. Special shaped brick units shall have a separate allowance. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Work: 1. Wall Covering: a. During erection, cover top of wall with strong nonstaining waterproof membrane at end of each day or shutdown. b. Cover partially completed walls when work is not in progress. c. Extend cover minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) down both sides. d. Hold cover securely in place. 2. Load Applications: a. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry columns or wall. b. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry columns or walls. 3. Stain Prevention: a. Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry. b. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with face of such masonry. c. Protect all sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar. d. Protect base of wall from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter. e. Scaffold boards shall be turned on edge when work is not in progress. B. Cold Weather Protection: 1. Preparation: a. When ice or snow has formed on masonry bed, remove by carefully applying heat not to exceed 120 degrees F (49 degrees C) until surface is dry to the touch. b. Remove all masonry deemed frozen or damaged. 2. Products: a. When brick suction exceeds BIA reference standard, sprinkle with heated water: 1) When units are above 32 degrees F (0 degrees C), heat water above 70 degrees F (21 degrees C). 2) When units are below 32 degrees F (0 degrees C), heat water above 130 degrees F (54 degrees C). b. Use dry masonry units. c. Do not use wet or frozen units. 3. Construction Requirements While Work is Progressing: a. Air temperature 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0 degrees C): 1) Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0 degrees C). b. Air temperature 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C): 1) Heat sand and mixing water to produce temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees C). 2) Maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. c. Air temperatures 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C) to 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C). 1) Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F. (49 degrees C). 2) Maintain mortar temperatures on boards above freezing. 3) Use salamanders or other heat sources on both sides of walls under construction. 4) Use windbreaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph (24 kms/h). d. Air temperature 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) and below: 1) Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees C.). Typical Home Masonry Brick

42 2) Provide enclosures and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32 degrees F (0 degrees C). 3) Minimum temperature of units when laid: 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C). 4. Protection requirements for completed masonry and masonry not being worked on: a. Mean daily air temperature 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0 degrees C): 1) Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours by covering with weather-resistive membrane. b. Mean daily air temperature 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C): 1) Completely cover masonry with weather-resistive membrane for 24 hrs. c. Mean daily temperature 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C) to 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C): 1) Completely cover masonry with insulating blankets or equal protection for 24 hours. d. Mean daily air temperature 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) and below: 1) Maintain masonry temperature above 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) for 24 hours by: a) Method: Enclosure and supplementary heat. b) Method: Electric heating blankets. c) Method: Infrared lamps. d) Method: Other approved methods. C. Hot Weather Protection: 1. When temperature exceeds 100 degrees F or 90 degrees F with 8 mph wind (above 38 degrees C or 32 degrees C with 13 kms/h wind). a. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout between 70 degrees F and 120 degrees F (21 degrees C and 49 degrees C). 1) Limit spread of mortar bed to 4 feet (1.2 m). Place units within 1 minute of spreading mortar. b. Partially or recently completed walls may be fog sprayed and/or covered with opaque plastic or canvas or both to control moisture evaporation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Belden Brick Company (The), which is located at: 700 W. Tuscarawas St. P. O. Box ; Canton, OH 44702; Tel: ; request info (info@beldenbrick.com); Web: B. Substitutions: Not permitted. C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section CLAY MASONRY UNITS A. All brick specified and shown on drawing shall be as Manufactured by The Belden Brick Company. 1. Facing Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, a. Type FBS. b. Type FBX. c. Type FBA. d. Size: by by (t by h by l) 2. Hollow Brick: ASTM C 652, Grade SW. a. Type HBS. Typical Home Masonry Brick

43 b. Type HBX. c. Type HBA. d. Size: by by (t by h by l) 3. Thin Veneer Brick: ASTM C a. Grade Exterior. b. Grade Interior. c. Type FBS. d. Type FBX. e. Type FBA. f. Size: by by (t by h by l). B. Minimum Compressive Strength:. C. Maximum Initial Rate of Absorption (IRA):. D. Provide brick similar in texture, color and physical properties to those available for inspection at the Architect/Engineer's office and/or as supplied on the approved sample panel. E. Shapes: Special shapes are required to be used per architectural detail(s). F. All brick supplied shall be pre-blended by the manufacturer. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: 1. Billet Steel Deformed Bars: ASTM A Rail Steel Deformed Bars: ASTM A 616 or A Axle Steel Deformed Bars: ASTM A 617 or A Epoxy Coated Billet Steel: ASTM A 615 and ASTM A ANCHORS AND TIES A. Corrugated Ties: ASTM A 1008, 20 Gage, Width: inch, length: inches, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2. B. Truss Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 82 (ASTM A 666), Size, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2. C. Ladder Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 82 (ASTM A 666), Size, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2. D. Wire Wall Ties: ASTM A 82, Wire Size:, Shape:, Length: inches, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2. E. Dovetail Anchors: ASTM A 1008, Gage:, Length: inches, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2. F. Anchors: 1. Plate Bent Bar Anchors: ASTM A 36, Diameter: inch, Length: inches, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B Plate Header Bar Anchors: ASTM A 36, Diameter: inch, Length: inches, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B FLASHING A. Copper: ASTM B 370, 5 oz. B. Copper: ASTM B 370, 7 oz. Typical Home Masonry Brick

44 C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Grade, Type 304. D. Plastic: PVC, 30 mil (0.75 mm) thick. 1. Thin PVC flashings are not generally recommended as a through wall. 2. Flashing because of their life expectancy. E. Combinations 1. Plastic/Copper: 5 oz. 2. Cooper/Fabric: 5 oz. 3. Asphalt-Coated Copper: 5 oz. 4. Plastic/Copper: 7 oz. 5. Cooper/Fabric: 7 oz. 6. Asphalt-Coated Copper: 7 oz. 2.6 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Premolded Foam: ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1. B. Neoprene: ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1. C. Backer Rod: Extruded, Closed Cell Polyethylene. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Weepholes: 1. Rope Wicks: Cotton Sash Cord, 12 inches long with end laid in cavity. 2. Plastic Tubes: 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum inside diameter by 4 inches (102 mm) long. 3. Aluminum Weep/Vents. 4. Plastic Weep/Vents. 2.8 MORTAR A. Mortar shall conform to ASTM C 270 under the guidelines provided in BIA Technical Notes #8 Series. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Cleaning Reinforcement: 1. Remove mud, loose rust, ice and other coatings from reinforcement which would interfere with bond. C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Typical Home Masonry Brick

45 3.4 BONDING A. Lay masonry in bond pattern as indicated on drawings or general notes. 1. Reference BIA Technical Note #30 for additional requirements. 3.5 LAYING MASONRY A. Lay masonry with full head and bed joints. B. Lay all brick plumb and true to lines. C. Where fresh mortar joins partially set mortar, remove loose brick and mortar, and lightly wet exposed surface of set masonry. D. Toothing shall be subject to approval by the Architect/Engineer. E. When adjustment is necessary to be made after mortar begins to harden, remove hardened mortar and replace with fresh mortar. 3.6 TOOLING AND POINTING A. Joint Profile: Tool mortar joints to a concave appearance. B. Joint Profile: Tool mortar joints to a concave V-shaped appearance. C. Joint Profile: Tool mortar joints to a concave grapevine appearance. D. Tool exposed joints when "thumb-print" hard. E. Flush cut all joints not tooled. F. When pointing, rake mortar joints to a depth of not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm). Fill solidly with pointing mortar. Tool joints. 3.7 FLASHING A. Clean surface of masonry from projections which might puncture flashing. B. Place through-wall flashing on bed of mortar. C. Cover flashing with mortar. D. Lap flashing a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm). E. Leave flashing project from face of wall approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) to form a drip. Flashing shall be cut back to the face of the wall after inspection, if the drip is deemed objectionable by Architect. 3.8 WEEPHOLES A. Provide weep holes in head joints of the first brick course immediately above flashing by placing weeps no more than 24 inches (610 mm) on center horizontally. B. Keep cavity free from mortar. 3.9 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Keep clean from all mortar and debris. Typical Home Masonry Brick

46 B. Locate as shown on drawing. C. Install neoprene pre-molded foam pad. D. Install backer rod. E. Install sealant. Prime surfaces if necessary CLEANING A. Cut out all defective mortar joints and holes in exposed masonry and provide new mortar. B. Clean pre-selected sample wall area. Do not proceed with cleaning until approved by Architect. C. Clean brick as outlined in BIA Technical Notes 20 Revised II. D. All cleaning practices and product used shall be in accordance with cleaning products manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION Typical Home Masonry Brick

47 SECTION CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SECTION ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Split Face architectural concrete masonry units 2. Ground Face architectural concrete masonry units 3. Polished Face architectural concrete masonry units 4. Shot-blasted architectural concrete masonry units 4. Split-Ribbed architectural concrete masonry units 5. Smooth, Colored architectural concrete masonry units 6. WallBrick architectural concrete masonry units B. Related Sections: 1. Section Masonry Mortaring 2. Section Masonry Grout 3. Section Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement 4. Section Masonry Accessories 5. Section Structural Steel Framing 6. Section Metal Fabrications 7. Section Water Repellants 6. Section Joint Protection REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. 3. ACI Specification for Masonry Structures. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Typical Home

48 1.03. SUBMITTALS 1. ASTM C 270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry 2. ASTM C 90 - Specification for Load-bearing Concrete Masonry Units 3. ASTM C Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. 4. ASTM E 514 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry A. Specified in Section Submittal Procedures B. Color Selection QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. For Initial Selection: Unit masonry sample box-sized samples showing the full range of colors and textures available for each different exposed masonry unit required 2. For Verification Purposes: Full-size units or full face shells showing the full range of colors and textures expected in the completed project A. Construction: Construct masonry in accordance with requirements of ACI 530 and B. Special Inspection and Testing: Provide inspection and testing in accordance with the Building Code and as noted on Drawings and will be performed under provisions of Section C. Mock-up: Construct a masonry wall mock-up panel to represent the selected exterior masonry wall color(s), texture characteristics, and bond pattern. 1. Construct wall at least 4 feet long by 4 feet high. 2. Locate where directed by Architect/Owner's Representative. 3. Include bond pattern, joint profile and mortar colors for all face textures and colors. 4. Include reinforcement, flashing and weeps as indicated on drawings. 5. Erect entire mock-up with methods representative of standard, daily construction and inprogress cleaning practices. 6. Mock-up sample panel must receive acceptance by Architect/Owner's Representative before proceeding with masonry installation. 7. Once accepted, mock-up sample panel will be used as the standard of quality for masonry work on the project. 8. Leave mock-up sample panel in place until project completion DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and handle architectural masonry materials as to prevent damage 4. Deliver architectural masonry units wrapped and on wooden pallets Typical Home

49 Typical Home Cover stacked masonry units with protective waterproof covering that will allow air circulation between blocks and pallets to prevent excessive moisture accumulation 6. Ground and Polished Face masonry units to be packaged with protective foam membrane between block layers to minimize chipping. B. Store architectural masonry units in a location as to minimize handling, exposure to excessive moisture, contaminants, corrosion, and materials that could cause staining. C. Store mortar materials off the ground with waterproof covering and in a dry location PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements (Cold Weather): Follow the requirements of the MIC Hot and Cold Weather Construction. Include the following construction requirements for cold weather procedures: 1. When ambient air temperatures are above 40 degrees F cover tops of walls and masonry elements with plastic or canvas at end of workday to prevent water from entering masonry. 2. When ambient air temperatures are below 40 degrees F and above 32 degrees F or temperature of masonry units is below 40 degrees F: a. Remove visible ice on masonry units before units are placed in the wall. b. Do not lay masonry units having a temperature below 20 degrees F. c. Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F at the time of mixing. d. Maintain mortar and grout temperatures above freezing until used in masonry. e. Cover tops of walls and masonry elements with weather resistive membrane at end of workday to prevent water from entering masonry. 3. When ambient air temperatures are below 32 degrees F and above 25 degrees F or temperature of masonry units is below 40 degrees F: a. Remove visible ice on masonry units before units are placed in the wall. b. Do not lay masonry units having a temperature below 20 degrees F. c. Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F at the time of mixing. d. Maintain mortar and grout temperatures above freezing until used in masonry. e. Completely cover walls and masonry elements with weather resistive membrane at end of work day and keep covers in place for 24 hours. 4. When ambient air temperature is below 25 degrees F and above 20 degrees F: a. Remove visible ice on masonry units before units are placed in the wall.

50 b. Do not lay masonry units having a temperature below 20 degrees F. c. Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F at the time of mixing. d. Maintain mortar and grout temperatures above freezing until used in masonry. e. Use heat source on both sides of masonry under construction. f. Install wind breaks when wind velocity is in excess of 15 mph. g. Completely cover walls and masonry elements with insulated blankets or equivalent protection at end of workday and keep covers in place for 24 hrs. 5. When ambient temperature is below 20 degrees F: a. Remove visible ice on masonry units before units are placed in the wall. b. Do not lay masonry units having a temperature below 20 degrees F. c. Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F at the time of mixing. d. Maintain mortar and grout temperatures above freezing until used in masonry. e. Provide an enclosure for the masonry under construction. f. Use heat sources to maintain temperatures above 32 degrees F within the enclosure. g. Maintain masonry temperature above 32 degrees F for 24 hours after construction by enclosure with supplementary heat, electric heating blankets, infrared heat lamps, or other acceptable methods. B. Environmental Requirements (Hot Weather): Follow the requirements of the MIC Hot and Cold Weather Construction. Include the following construction requirements for hot weather procedures: 1. When ambient temperature is above 115 degrees F or ambient air temperature isabove 105 degrees F and wind velocity exceeds 8 mph: a. Shade materials and mixing equipment from direct sunlight. b. Maintain sand piles in damp loose condition. c. Provide necessary conditions and equipment to produce mortar and grout having temperatures below 120 degrees F. d. Use cool mixing water for mortar and grout. e. Maintain temperatures of mortar and grout below 120 degrees F. f. Flush mixer, mortar and grout transport container, and mortarboards with cool water before the come in contact with mortar or grout. Typical Home

51 g. Maintain mortar consistency by re-tempering with cool water. h. Use mortar within 2 hours of initial mixing. i. Fog spray all newly constructed masonry until damp, at least three times a day until the masonry is 3-days old. 2. When ambient temperature is above 100 degrees F or ambient air temperature is above 90 degrees F and wind velocity exceeds 8 mph: a. Maintain sand piles in damp loose condition. b. Provide necessary conditions and equipment to produce and maintain mortar and grout having temperatures below 120 degrees F. c. Maintain mortar and grout temperatures below 120 degrees F. d. Flush mixer, mortar and grout transport container, and mortarboards with cool water before the come in contact with mortar or grout. e. Maintain mortar consistency by re-tempering with cool water. f. Use mortar within 2 hours of initial mixing. g. Fog spray all newly constructed masonry until damp, at least three times a day until the masonry is three days old. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Manufacturers A. Acceptable Manufacturers: B. Substitutions: 2.02 Concrete Masonry Units 3. CEMEX USA, Florida Region; Telephone (888) CEMEX USA, Carolina Region; Telephone (800) Products of equal quality must be submitted and approved by Architect at least ten (10) days prior to bid date 2. No substitutions will be accepted after General Contractor is awarded A. Concrete Masonry Units General: 1. Provide concrete masonry standard units as indicated and scheduled with face dimensions of 16 inches long by 8 inches high, nominal; 15-5/8 inches long by 7-5/8 inches high, actual, by thicknesses indicated on drawings Typical Home

52 2. Provide special masonry units for bond beams, corners, control and expansion joints, and lintels. 3. Hollow and solid load-bearing block: ASTM C-90, normal weight, 125 pounds per cubic foot dry weight minimum. B. Architectural Concrete Masonry Units: CEMEX USA Architectural Block; all colored units produced with integral water repellant admixture DryBlock by Grace Construction Products, or approved equal. 1. Face: Split Face; rough exposed aggregate, uneven natural split texture a. Manufactured with a vertical chamfered edge on each side to insure a controlled, straight split on the unit face shell 2. Face: Ground Face; machine ground, smooth exposed aggregate texture a. Manufactured with a minimum of three (3) grinding heads to insure a smooth, consistent face shell texture 3. Face: Polished Face; machine polished smooth, exposed aggregate texture a. Manufactured with a minimum of nine (9) polishing heads to insure a smooth, polished face shell texture 4. Face: Shot-Blasted; steel bead, machine shot-blasted, exposed aggregate texture a. Standard Texture b. Course Texture 5. Face: Split-Ribbed; vertically split-ribs (4, 8, or 16), rough exposed aggregate texture a. Manufactured with a vertical chamfered edge on each side and ribs to insure a controlled, straight split on the unit face shell. 6. Face: Smooth, Colored; smooth-finished concrete masonry unit texture 7. Face: WallBrick; ½ high, smooth texture, blended color face 8. Size(s): (OR) 9. Size(s): As indicated on drawings 10. Color(s): (OR) 11. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer s full line of each specified face 12. Shapes: Provide special masonry units for bond beams, corners, sills, caps, control and expansion joints, and lintels ANCHORAGE AND REINFORCING Typical Home

53 A. Specified in Section ACCESSORIES A. Specified in Section PART 3 - EXECUTION INSPECTION A. Prior to the start of masonry construction the Contractor shall verify: 1. Foundations are constructed with tolerances conforming to ACI Reinforcing dowels are positioned in accordance with Project Drawings. 3. Verify items provided by other Sections of the Work are properly sized and located. B. If conditions are not met notify the Architect/Owners Representative PREPARATION A. Establish Lines, Levels, and Coursing: 1. Protect lines from disturbance. 2. Use non-corrosive materials in contact with masonry. B. Surface Preparation: Prior to placing masonry units remove, loose aggregate or any other materials that would prevent mortar from bonding to the foundation COURSING AND BONDING PLACING A. Placement: Place masonry units to lines and levels indicated on plans. B. Uniformity: Maintain masonry coursing and horizontal joints of uniform width and thickness. C. Bond Patterns: Place masonry units in running bond pattern unless otherwise noted on plans. D. Course Height: Course one masonry unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches (4 inches for ½ high units) A. Bed and Head Joints: 1. Joint Thickness: a. Construct 3/8-inch bed and head joints unless otherwise indicated. Typical Home

54 b. Construct bed joint at starting course on foundation not less than ¼ inch and not more than ¾ inch. 2. Fill holes not specified in exposed and below grade masonry with mortar. 3. Tool head and bed joints concave unless below grade or above ceiling height and to be concealed. a. Use tool with large enough radius that joint is not raked free of mortar. 4. Remove masonry protrusions extending ½ inch or more into cells or cavities to be grouted. B. Unit Placement: 1. Lay masonry units with bed and head joints filled from the faces of the units to a distance in not less than the thickness of the face shell. a. Vertical cells to be grouted are aligned and unobstructed openings for grout must be provided in accordance with drawings. 2. Keep cavity airspace and weep holes clean of mortar, clean out promptly if mortar falls into cavity airspace or plugs weep holes. 3. Remove excess mortar 4. Adjustments: a. Protect wall from mud splatter and mortar droppings. b. Place masonry units such that mortar does not run down the face of the wall or smear the masonry face. a. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. b. Where adjustments must be made, remove mortar and replace. 5. Protection: Protect wall cavities during construction to prevent rainwater saturation and excessive moisture accumulation TOLERANCES: Erect masonry within the following tolerances from specified dimensions: A. Dimension of Elements: 2. In cross-section or elevation: minus ¼ inch, plus ½ inch 2. Mortar joint thickness: a. Bed joints: plus or minus 1/8 inch b. Head joints: plus 3/8 inch to minus ¼ inch c. Collar joints: plus 3/8 inch to minus ¼ inch Typical Home

55 B. Elements 1. Variation from level: a. Bed joints: plus or minus1/4 inch in 10 feet; plus or minus 1/2 inch maximum. b. Top surface of bearing walls: plus or minus1/4 inch in 10 feet; plus or minus ½ inch maximum. 2. Variation from plumb: plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet; plus or minus 3/8 inch in 20 feet; plus or minus 1/2 inch max. 3. True to line: plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet; plus or minus 3/8 inch in 20 feet; plus or minus 1/2 inch maximum. 4. Alignment of columns and walls (bottom versus top): C. Location of elements: a. Bearing: plus or minus 1/2 inch. b. Non-bearing: plus or minus 3/4 inch 1. Indicated in plan: plus or minus ½ inch in 20 feet; plus or minus ¾ inch maximum 2. Indicated in elevation: plus or minus ¼ inch in story height; plus or minus ¾ inch max. C. Notification: If the above conditions cannot be met, notify Architect/Owner's Representative ANCHORAGE AND REINFORCING A. Specified in Section GROUT PLACEMENT A. Specified in Section CLEANING AND SEALING 3.04.B.3. A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses within seven days by dry brushing to remove excess mortar and smears before tooling joints, as described in section B. Final Cleaning and Sealing: Clean and seal exposed masonry as follows: 2. Clean masonry before installing windows, door, finished flooring, metal fixtures, hardware, light fixtures, roofing materials and other non-masonry items. 2. If already installed, protect from cleaning solution with polyethylene film or waterproof masking tape. 3. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic tools Typical Home

56 4. Always test cleaner on sample panel or small area to demonstrate products, procedures and stain suitability of each type of stain 5. Materials: Clean and Seal masonry units with the following masonry products: FIELD QUALITY CONTROL a. For Polished Face or Ground Face use: i. Sure Klean Burnished Custom Masonry Cleaner, by Prosoco or approved equal, as per manufacturer s instructions and cleaning procedures. ii. Sure Klean Burnished Masonry Sealer, by Prosoco or approved equal, as per manufacturer s instructions and sealing procedures. b. For Split Face, Split-Ribbed and Shot-Blasted use: i. Sure Klean Custom Masonry Cleaner, by Prosoco or approvedequal, as per manufacturer s instructions and cleaning procedures. ii. Sure Klean Custom Masonry Sealer, by Prosoco or approved equal, as per manufacturer s instructions and sealing procedures. c. For Smooth Face and WallBrick use: A. Masonry: Specified in Section END OF SECTION i. Sure Klean Concrete Brick Cleaner, by Prosoco or approved equal, asper manufacturer s instructions and cleaning procedures ii. Sure Klean Custom Masonry Sealer, by Prosoco or approved equal,as per manufacturer s instructions and sealing procedures. Typical Home

57 SECTION GLASS UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE Furnish and install all window perimeter frame pieces, T-Bar grid members, glazing materials, expansion-contraction thermal foam tape, sealants, framing, flashings, and other items necessary for complete window installation as indicated on the drawings and specified herein RELATED SECTIONS A Glass and Glazing B Sealants C Flashings 1.03 GUARANTEE A. Window manufacturer shall guarantee for a period of one year from the date of purchase that the windows will be free of defects in materials and factory workmanship, and that defective materials will be repaired or replaced immediately, after proper notification. B. The installing contractor shall guarantee for a period of one year against faulty installation workmanship or water leakage due to on-site errors MATERIAL STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store material in dry place, off the ground, where temperature will not exceed 90 degrees Fahrenheit. B. Handle material to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Do not install scratched or damaged components. C. After installation, protect finished surfaces from damage caused by ensuing work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. IBP Glass Block Grid System: 6063-T6 and 6463-T6 extruded aluminum Glass Block Grid System for windows as manufactured by Innovative Building Products, Inc., 2917 W. 7th Street, Fort Worth, TX Glass Unit Masonry

58 B. Expansion-contraction thermal foam tape: Adhesive backed, closed cell foam, 1/16" or 3/32" thick. C. Sealant: TradeMate Glass Block Sealant D. Finish: Selected from manufacturer's standard finishes and colors. E. Glass block units: 7-3/4 x 7-3/4 x 3-1/8 thick, partially evacuated hollow units, made of clear or colored glass as manufactured by Pittsburgh Corning, Solaris, or Weck. PART 3 EXECUTIONS 3.01 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Very all applicable fields dimensions and adjust as necessary to accommodate window frame. B. Examine supporting frame to which window will be attached. Correct any conditions which are not constructed according to installation instructions furnished by window manufacturer INSTALLATION A. Assemble and seal glass block grid system for window according to instructions furnished by manufacturer. B. Apply continuous sealant bead to back of window Z-bar. Place assembled glass block grid system frame into properly prepared and sized rough opening and adjust until plumb and level. Screw or nail grid system in place utilized all predrilled holes in nailing flange. C. Adhere foam tape gasket to each glass block according to instructions furnished by glass block grid system manufacturer. Carefully insert glass blocks into grid system from exterior side of window so that each block is pressed against T-Bar and foam tape does not roll back. D. Apply sealant to completely fill channel around each glass block and wipe flush with surface. Apply sealant to exterior frame corners according to instructions furnished by grid system manufacturer CLEANUP A. Clean all exposed surfaces of aluminum glass block grid system with clean, soft cloth and mild hand soap using gentle rubbin action. Do not use abrasive or solvent-type cleaners, detergents or paint removers. END OF SECTION Glass Unit Masonry

59 Section MORTAR-PLACED STONE ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section includes solid masonry construction of base supported natural full stone veneer, set in cement mortar, with a structural back-up of masonry or metal lath on a structural backing. B. Section includes special decorative cut stone shapes for trim. C. Section includes installation of built-in accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete Foundations. B. Section Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete supporting wall. C. Section Unit Masonry Assemblies: Masonry supporting wall. D. Section Metal Fabrications: Lintels, Shelf angles, structural supports, anchors and other built-in components for building into stone veneer masonry by this section. E. Section Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Formed steel framed supporting wall. F. Section Framing and Sheathing: Wood frame supporting wall. G. Section Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. H. Section Joint Sealers: Sealant for perimeter and control joints. I. Section Cement Plaster: Metal lath and scratch coat back-up over supporting walls. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. B. ASTM A Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire. C. ASTM A Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. D. ASTM C 91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement. E. ASTM C 97 - Standard Specification for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Dimension Stone. F. ASTM C 99 - Standard Specification for Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone. G. ASTM C Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. H. ASTM C Standard Specification for Portland Cement. I. ASTM C Standard Specification for Compressive Strength of Dimension Stone. J. ASTM C Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. Typical Home

60 K. ASTM C Mortar for Unit Masonry. L. ASTM C 615 Standard Specification for Granite Dimension Stone. M. ASTM C Standard Specification for Quartz-Based Dimension Stone. N. ASTM C Preconstruction Evaluation of Mortar for Plain & Reinforced Masonry. O. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. P. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS Specifications for Masonry Structures. Q. National Concrete Masonry Association TEK 8-2A for masonry cleaning. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section B. [ Product Data ]: Quarrier or natural stone data sheets on stone and mortar mix to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Cleaning methods. C. Design Data: Submit design mix when Property specification of ASTM C270 is to be used, with required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations. D. Selection Samples: For each stone product specified, submit two samples, minimum size 48 inches (1216 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and texture. E. Samples: Submit samples of mortar representing actual mortar color and color range. F. Quarrier's Certificate: Certify stone properties and mortar mix will conform to specified requirements. G. Construct sample panel at location indicated or directed, and as follows: 1. Recommended Size: 8 feet x 8 feet (2.4 m by 2.4 m) or a size that satisfies the architect. This size should be no less than 4 feet x 4 feet (1.2 m by 1.2 M). 2. Include all stone unit types and sizes to be used including a typical corner condition, special shapes and mortar joint treatment. Clean the sample panel using the same materials and tools as planned for the final stone masonry construction. 3. Obtain architect's acceptance of sample panel before beginning construction activities of this section. 4. Do not remove sample panel until construction activities of this section have been accepted by the Architect. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Stone Quarrier: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Stone Masonry Company: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Typical Home

61 A. Design Requirements: Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 Specifications for Masonry Structures and the applicable Building Code. B. Design foundations, supporting walls, anchorage, spans, fastening, and joints under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at Project location. C. Preconstruction Meetings: Conduct preconstruction meetings including the Architect, Contractor, stone masonry subcontractor, and the flashing subcontractor to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions and other requirements. Comply with Division 1 requirements. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products on pallets, under cover and in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store stone materials on pallets on a dry level surface. Pallets shall not be stacked and shall be covered with tarps. C. Store mortar under cover and in an area where temperature is maintained between 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) to 43 degrees C (110 degrees F). 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Hot and Cold Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 Specifications for Masonry Structures. B. Ambient temperature shall be 40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C) or above during erection of stone masonry. When ambient temperature falls below 50 degrees F, mortar mixing water shall be heated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Stone Quarrier : Krukowski Stone Co., Inc., 3781 County Road C, Mosinee, Wisconsin 54455, ASD, Phone: , Toll free: , Fax: , Internet: B. Substitutions: Not permitted. C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section VENEER STONE A. General: Full Natural stone veneers shall vary in depth 3 to 5 inches (76 to 127 mm) some up to 7 inches (178 mm), heights of 3 to 8 inches (76 to 203 mm), or higher where indicated and is furnished in random lengths from 8 inches to 30 inches (203 mm to 762 mm). All full veneers listed below are available in a sawn thin veneer. Sawn thin veneers sawn to a nominal depth of 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches (19 mm to 38 mm) plus or minus 1/2 inch (12.5 mm). B. Quartzite Sandstone Blends: Quartzite sandstone blends full veneers vary in depth 3 to 5 inches (76 to 127 mm) or up to 7 inches (178 mm) as noted below. The lengths vary from 6 to 30 inches (203 to 762 mm). Typical Home

62 1. Properties: a. Material Type: Quartzite Sandstone. b. Material Class: Metamorphic. c. Dry Density: pcf d. Bulk Specific Gravity: 2.54 e. Absorption: 0.5 percent f. Modulus of Rupture: 1,850 psi g. Compressive Strength: 17,700 psi h. Freeze-Thaw Weight Loss: < 0.5 percent i. Abrasion Resistance: 63.8 j. Mohs Hardness: Sandy Creek Shades of buff & tan, may contain little to strong tan and crimson veining. In most products the top and the bottom of the Sandy Creek stone is the natural bed height and therefore a darker brown color. a. Sandy Creek Ledgerock Veneer Shades of buff & tan may contain little to strong tan or crimson veining. 100% Split-Face, 3-5 Depth, 1-3 Heights, 8-20 Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton b. Sandy Creek Shades of buff & tan may contain little to strong tan or crimson veining. 100% Split-Face, 3-5 Depth, 3-8 Heights, 6-30 Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton c. Sandy Creek Jumpers Shades of buff & tan may contain little to strong tan or crimson veining. 100% Split-Face, 3-5 Depth, 8-14 Heights, Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton d. Sandy Creek Kings Blend Shades of buff & tan may contain little to strong tan or crimson veining. 100% Split-Face, 3-5 Depth, 3-8 Heights, Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton e. Sandy Creek Sawn Heights Shades of buff & tan may contain little to strong tan or crimson veining. 100% Split-Face, 3-5 Depth, 2¼, 3½, 5, 7½, & 7¾ Sawn Heights (+/- ¼ ), 6-30 Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton f. Sandy Creek Jumpers Hand-pitched Shades of buff & tan may contain little to strong tan or crimson veining. 100% Split-Face, 3-6 Depth, 6-14 Heights, Lengths Covers 40 Sq. Ft. per ton (Each piece is hand-pitched to give a distinct pillow look) 3. Highland Brown Variations of brown tones, consisting of light tan, auburn, cedar, dark brown. Naturally Weathered, Seam Face and/or Bed Face material a. Highland Brown Antique Variations of brown tones, consisting of light tan, auburn, cedar, dark brown. Seam face and/or bed face 3-5 Depth, 3-8 Heights, 6-30 Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton b. Highland Brown Antique Jumpers Variations of brown tones, consisting of light tan, auburn, cedar, dark brown. Seam face and/or bed face 3-5 Depth, 8-14 Heights, Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton c. Highland Brown Kings Blend Variations of brown tones, consisting of light tan, auburn, cedar, dark brown. Typical Home

63 Seam face and/or bed face 3-5 Depth, 3-8 Heights, Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton d. Highland Brown Webwall Variations of brown tones, consisting of light tan, auburn, cedar, dark brown. Bed-face, Irregular Shapes 4-7 Depth, 6-36 Diameters Covers Sq. Ft. per ton e. Highland Brown Palace Blend Variations of brown tones, consisting of light tan, auburn, cedar, dark brown. Bed-face 3-6 Depth, 4, 6, 8 & 12 or 6, 8, 12 & 18 (+/- ¼ ) Snapped Heights, 6-30 Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton f. Highland Brown Sawn Heights Variations of brown tones, consisting of light tan, auburn, cedar, dark brown. Seam face and/or bed face 3-5 Depth, 2¼, 3½, 5, 7½, & 7¾ (+/- ¼ ) Sawn Heights, 6-30 Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton 4. Glacier Bay Antiqued tumbled texture, shades of buff, tan, & variations of brown. a. Glacier Bay Ashlar Antiqued, tumbled texture, shades of buff, & tan. Tumbled Texture, darker tones can be achieved by laying pieces bed-face out. 3-5 Depth, 3-8 Heights, Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton b. Glacier Bay Fortress Blend - Rectangular Antiqued tumbled split-face or bed-face texture, shades of buff, tan, & variations of brown. 3-5 Depth, 4 x 6 to 8 x 14 Square & Rectangular shaped pieces Covers Sq. Ft. per ton c. Glacier Bay Fortress Blend - Irregular Antiqued tumbled split-face or bed-face texture, shades of buff, tan, & variations of brown. 3-5 Depth, 4 x 6 to 8 x 14 Irregular shaped pieces Covers Sq. Ft. per ton d. Glacier Bay Palace Blend Antiqued tumbled texture, shades of buff, tan, & variations of brown. 3-5 Depth, 6, 8 & 12 Snapped Heights, Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton e. Glacier Bay Fieldstone Antiqued tumbled bed-face texture, shades of buff, tan, & variations of brown. Irregular Webwall Contour 3-6 Depth, 6-20 Diameters Covers Sq. Ft. per ton f. Glacier Bay Sawn Heights Antiqued tumbled (split-face) texture, shades of light buff. 3-5 Depth, 2¼, 3½, 5, 7½, & 7¾ (+/- ¼ ), Sawn Heights, Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton 5. Chestnut - Medium to dark brown, chocolate and brown tones. a. Chestnut Ashlar Medium to dark brown, chocolate and brown tones. Weathered edge and bed-face, natural and snapped heights 3-5 Depth, 3-10 Heights, 6-24 Lengths Typical Home

64 Covers Sq. Ft. per ton b. Chestnut Boulders Can have large variations in coloring ranging from medium to dark chocolate & coffee brown tones 100% Bed-Face, Irregular Shapes, 4-7 Depth, 6-30 Diameter Covers Sq. Ft. per ton c. Chestnut Palace Blend Medium to dark chocolate & coffee brown tones 100% Bed-Face, 3-5 Depth, 4, 6, 8 & 12 or 6, 8, 12 & 18 (+/- ¼ ) Snapped Heights, Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton 6. Apple Creek Horizontal veining consisting of buff, mauve, & crimson colorations. a. Apple Creek Horizontal veining consisting of buff, mauve, & crimson colorations. 100% Split-Face, 3-5 Depth, 2-6 Heights, 6-30 Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton b. Apple Creek Ledgerock Horizontal veining consisting of buff, mauve, & crimson colorations. 100% Split-Face, 3-5 Depth, 1½ - 4 Heights, 6-30 Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton 7. Architectural Blends a. Desert Blend A blend of: 50% Sandy Creek, 50% Highland Brown, 3-5 Depth, 3-8 Height, Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton b. Desert Blend Sawn Heights A blend of: 50% Sandy Creek, 50% Highland Brown 3-5 Depth, 2¼, 3½, 5, 7½, & 7¾ (+/- ¼ ) Sawn Heights Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton c. Church Blend A blend of: 50% Sandy Creek, 50% Apple Creek 3-5 Depth, 2-8 Heights, Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton d. Church Blend Ledgerock A blend of: 50% Sandy Creek Ledgerock, 50% Apple Creek Ledgerock 3-5 Depth, 1-4 Heights, 6-30 Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton e. Cambrian Blend A blend of: 40% Sandy Creek, 40% Highland Brown, 20% Chestnut Boulder 3-7 Depth, 3-8 Heights, Lengths, Diameters Covers Sq. Ft. per ton f. Cambrian Blend Ashlar A blend of: 40% Sandy Creek, 40% Highland Brown, 20% Chestnut Ashlar 3-5 Depth, 3-10 Heights, 6-30 Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton g. Autumn Sunburst A blend of: 60% Highland Brown, 40% Chestnut Boulder 3-7 Depth, 6-30 Diameters, 3-8 Heights, 6-30 Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton h. Autumn Sunburst Ashlar A blend of: 60% Highland Brown, 40% Chestnut Ashlar 3-5 Depth, 3-10 Heights Covers Sq. Ft. per ton i. Autumn Sunburst Palace Blend Typical Home

65 A blend of: 60% Highland Brown Palace Blend, 40% Chestnut Palace Blend 3-5 Depth, 6-30 Length, 4, 6, 8, & 12 or 6, 8, 12, & 18 (+/- ¼ ) Snapped Heights Covers Sq. Ft. per ton j. Northridge Blend A blend of: 50% Highland Brown Webwall, 50% Chestnut Boulder 4-7 Depth, Diameters Covers Sq. Ft. per ton k. Omega Blend A blend of: 70% Highland Brown, 30% Sandy Creek 3-5 Depth, 4, 6, 8 & 10 (+/- ¼ ) Snapped Heights, 6-20 Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton l. Prairie House A blend of: 70% Sandy Creek, 30% Highland Brown, 3-5 Depth, 2-8 Heights, 6-20 Lengths with Rustic Ends Covers Sq. Ft. per ton C. Granitic Gneiss Blends: Granitic Gneiss blends including Aqua Blue and Aqua Grantique. Aqua Blue veneer is a natural freeform rustic stone 7 to 12 inches (178 to 305 mm) irregular diameter material in 3 to 7 inches (76 to 178 mm) depths. The Aqua Grantique is a sawn height veneer either 3.5 or 7.5 inches (89 or 191 mm) in height then guillotine split 3-5 inches bed depth and random lengths of 8 to 30 inches (203 to 762 mm). 1. Properties: a. Material Type: Granitic Gneiss b. Material Class: Metamorphic c. Dry Density: pcf d. Bulk Specific Gravity: 3.03 e. Absorption: 0.0 percent f. Modulus of Rupture: 2,910 psi g. Compressive Strength: 22,710 psi h. Freeze-Thaw Weight Loss: < 0.5 percent i. Mohs Hardness: 7 2. Aqua Grantique Rustic, weathered, dark blue/charcoal blue, with occasional rust coloring, also containing white quartz and green veining. a. Aqua Blue Boulder Rustic, weathered, dark blue stone may contain rust coloring, white quartz or green veining. Irregular Shapes, 4-7 Depth, Diameter Covers Sq. Ft. per ton b. Aqua Grantique Sawn Height Veneer Dark charcoal blue/black may contain rust coloring, white quartz or green veining. 100% Split-Face, 3-5 Depth, 2¼, 3½, 5, 7½, & 7¾ (+/- ¼ ) Sawn Heights, Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton c. Aqua Grantique Tumbled Sawn Height Veneer Antiqued tumbled, charcoal blue/black, may contain rust coloring, white quartz or green veining 100% Split-Face, Tumbled Texture, 3-5 Depth, 2¼, 3½, 5, 7½, & 7¾ (+/- ¼ ) Sawn Heights, 5-20 Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton d. Aqua Grantique Ledgerock Dark charcoal blue/black may contain rust coloring, white quartz or green veining. Typical Home

66 3-5 Depth, 1¼ & 2¼ Heights, 5-24 Lengths Covers 35 Sq. Ft. per ton 3. Architectural Blends a. St. Mary s Blend A blend of: 50% Aqua Blue, 50% Wausau Red, Diameter Covers Sq. Ft. per ton D. Quartzite Sandstone: Quartzite sandstone is a sawn height veneer 3.5 inches and 7.5 inches (89 to 191 mm) snapped face. 1. Properties: a. Material Type: Quartzite Sandstone b. Material Class: Metamorphic c. Dry Density: pcf d. Bulk Specific Gravity: 2.34 e. Absorption: 2.2 percent f. Modulus of Rupture: 1,765 psi g. Compressive Strength: 15,860 psi h. Freeze-Thaw Weight Loss: < 0.5 percent i. Mohs Hardness: Carmel Cream Extreme color variations from light buff, tan, burgundy or terracotta; contains light to excessive veining and swirls of dark brown, burgundy or rust. a. Carmel Cream Sawn Heights Extreme color variations from light buff, tan, burgundy or terracotta; contains light to excessive veining and swirls of dark brown, burgundy or rust. 100% Split-Face, 3-5 Depth, 2¼, 3½, 5, 7½, & 7¾ (+/- ¼ ) Sawn Heights, 6-30 Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton b. Carmel Cream Tumbled Sawn Heights Antiqued tumbled texture, extreme color variations from light buff, tan, burgundy or terracotta, contains light to excessive veining and swirls of dark brown, burgundy, or rust. 100% Split Face, Tumbled Texture, 3-5 Depth, 2 ¼, 3½, 5, 7½, & 7 ¾ (+/- ¼ ) Sawn Heights, 5-20 Lengths Covers Sq. Ft. per ton E. Wisconsin Granite Reds, pinks, grays, blues, burgundy, black & peppered 1. Wisconsin Granite Cobbles Reds, pinks, grays, blues, burgundy, black & peppered 3-6 Covers Sq. Ft. per ton 4-8 Covers Sq. Ft. per ton 7-12 Covers Sq. Ft. per ton 2. Wisconsin Split Fieldstone Split-face reds, pinks, grays, blues, burgundy, black & peppered 3-7 Depth, 6-18 Diameters Covers Sq. Ft. per ton 3. Wisconsin Cobbles Split Rounds Out Reds, pinks, grays, blues, burgundy, black & peppered 3-7 Depth, 8-18 Diameters Covers Sq. Ft. per ton *Please note: All of our materials are products of nature and therefore colors, veining, & character will vary from stone to stone. This is especially true with the Carmel Cream material. Typical Home

67 2.3 SPECIAL SHAPES A. Provide special shapes as indicated on the Drawings and as follows: 1. Quoins 2. Keystones 3. Edge stones 4. Cornerstones 5. Sills 6. Ledges 7. Medallions 8. Other. B. Stone shall be furnished in sizes indicated plus or minus ½ inch (12.5 mm). Material shall conform to C 616 for Quartzite Sandstone with the following properties: 1. Maximum absorption rate of 0.5 percent average when tested in accordance with ASTM C Average dry density of 158 lb per CF (2530 kg/m3) when tested in accordance with ASTM C Average compressive strength of 17,000 psi (122 Mpa) when tested in accordance with ASTM C Average modules of rupture 1,800 psi (12 Mpa) when tested in accordance with ASTM C99. C. Color shall be: 1. Match the veneer stone ACCESSORIES A. Joint Reinforcement: As specified in Section. B. Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, 22 gauge (0.73 mm) diameter, hot-dip galvanized to A 153, B2 finish: 1. Eye and pintle type. 2. Wall strap for bolted attachment to studs. 3. Wire loop for embedment in back-up masonry. 4. With provision for vertical adjustment after attachment. C. Wall ties: Formed steel wire, 22 gauge (0.73 mm) diameter, stainless steel Conforming to ASTM A Eye and pintle type. 2. Wall strap for bolted attachment to studs. 3. Wire loop for embedment in back-up masonry. 4. With provision for vertical adjustment after attachment. D. Other Anchors in Direct Contact with Stone: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless steel of sizes and configurations required for support of stone and applicable superimposed loads. E. Weephole Vent Devices: One piece aluminum Weephole Ventilator as manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard Inc. F. Setting Buttons and Shims: Lead or Plastic. 2.5 MORTAR A. Masonry Cement: Complying with ASTM C91: 1. Type N 2. Color, gray Typical Home

68 2.6. MIXES 3. Color, white or colored is optional 4. Color. B. Portland Cement: Complying with ASTM C150: 1. Type I 2. Type. 3. Color, gray. 4. Color, white or colored is optional. 5. Color. C. Mortar Aggregate: Complying with ASTM C144, standard masonry type. D. Hydrated Lime: Complying with ASTM C207: 1. Type S. 2. Type SA. E. Water: Clean and potable. A. Mortar Mixes: 1. Mortar for Structural Masonry: Complying with ASTM C270, using Proportion Specification. a. Type N. B. Mortar Mixing: 1. Mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270. Mix only in quantities needed for immediate use. 2. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower freezing point of mortar. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until backing structure is plumb, bearing surfaces are level and substrates are clean and properly prepared. B. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into stone masonry. C. Notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of reinforcement, anchors and accessories, flashings, weep holes and other moisture control products supplied by other sections. B. Clean all built-in items of loose rust, ice, mud, or other foreign matter before incorporating into the wall. All ferrous metal built into the wall shall be primed or galvanized. C. If required, provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain bracing in place until building structure provides permanent support. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install veneer stone and mortar in accordance with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 Specifications for Masonry Structures. Typical Home

69 B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension(s). Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Pattern Bond: 1. Lay stone with the bed-face, split-face or weather edge exposed, as material is described in stone veneer section 2.2. Take care to avoid a concentration of any one color to any one wall surface. 2. Maintain an approximate 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) joint, as stone allows. If a drystack installation is desired, stone is to be laid tight to one another, as the stone will naturally allow. 3. Do not use stacked vertical joints. 4. Lay out work in advance and distribute color range of stone uniformly over total work area. D. Anchoring: Tie stone to backing as required by the applicable Building Code. As a minimum tie stone to backing with metal ties as follows: 1. Provide minimum one tie per 2 square feet of wall surface area. 2. Maximum spacing between adjacent ties shall be 16 inches vertically and 32 inches o.c. horizontally. 3. Ties shall be imbedded in horizontal joints to a 2 inch minimum depth. 4. Provide additional ties at openings within 12 inches of opening. E. Joining Work: Where fresh masonry joints partially set masonry. 1. Remove loose stone and mortar. 2. Clean and lightly wet surface of set masonry. 3. To avoid a horizontal run of masonry rack back 1/2 (12.5 mm) the length of stone in each course. 4. Toothing is not permitted. F. Joints: 1. Lay stone with an approximate 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) mortar joint, as stone allows. 2. Tool joints when "thumb-print" hard with a round jointer slightly larger than the width of the joint. 3. Trowel-point or concave tool exterior joints below grade. 4. Flush cut joints to be finished with a soft brush only. 5. Re-tempering of mortar is not permitted. 6. Use non-corrosive stone shims as required to maintain uniform joint thickness. G. Flashing: 1. Clean surface of masonry smooth and remove any projections, which could damage flashings. 2. Place flashing on a bed of mortar. 3. Cover flashing with mortar. 4. Provide weep vents at head joints placed every 16 inches (406 mm) along the first course immediately above flashing or as recommended by weep vent manufacturer. 5. Use a non-corrosive, fluid conducting polymer mesh such as "Mortar Net", "Control Cavity", "CavClear" or equal to keep the air space behind the installed veneer stone, clear of mortar and mortar droppings. H. Control and Expansion Joints: Keep joints open and free of debris. Coordinate control joint in accordance with Section for sealant performance. I. Sealant Recesses: Provide open joint 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep and 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide, where masonry meets doors, windows and other exterior openings. Coordinate sealant joints in accordance with Section for sealant performance. J. Cutting And Fitting: Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, grounds, and other Typical Home

70 penetrations and adjacent materials. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test mortar and grout in accordance with Section B. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C780, Annex A4, for mortar aggregate ratio and ASTM C 780, Annex A5, for mortar water content. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Cover the top of unfinished stone masonry work to protect it from the weather. C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 3.6 CLEANING A. Promptly remove excess wet mortar from the face of the stone as work progresses. Clean stone masonry with a stiff nylon brush and clean water only. END OF SECTION Typical Home

71 SECTION ECHEGUREN SLATE FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Section Includes: Echeguren slate flooring and flagstone paving installations with accessories, as required for complete installation. Coordinate installation with waterproofing membrane at setting beds. Related Sections: Division 7: Waterproofing membrane at slate setting beds REFERENCES ANSI A 108.1: Installation of Tile with Portland Cement Mortar. ANSI A 108.5: Installation of Tile with Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. ANSI A : Installation of Grout in Tilework. Tile Council of America (TCA): Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation SUBMITTALS Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for each manufactured material. Shop Drawings: Provide pattern drawings indicating field and edge conditions for each area of stone flooring. Indicate locations and widths of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in slate flooring substrates and finished surfaces. Samples: Furnish samples of each type, color, grade, and finish of slate and each color of grout required for Project. Color Charts: Show full range of colors, textures and patterns available for each type of slate. Full Size Samples: Prepare sample panels consisting of not less than four slate units with grout Typical Home

72 mounted on plywood, clearly indicating pattern, coloration, and joints. Certification: Furnish manufacturer certification materials comply with Contract Documents for each shipment and type of slate, signed by supplier and installer. Maintenance Instructions: Furnish maintenance instructions including information regarding recommended materials and methods for cleaning and maintaining slate flooring systems QUALITY ASSURANCE Source: Obtain each stone from single quarry source, with consistent color range and texture throughout work; do not change sources or kinds of materials during course of work. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years successful experience completing installation similar to that required. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct meeting at site prior to commencing work related to slate flooring installation. Require attendance of parties directly affecting installation. Review procedures and coordination required with related work. Field Mock-Up: Provide mock-up of each type of installation using approved materials and specified methods of installation. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-up prior to start of installation. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into Project DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Handle material to prevent chipping, breakage, soiling or other damage. Protect edges of materials with wood or other rigid materials. Place and stack skids and units to distribute weight evenly and to prevent breakage or cracking SITE CONDITIONS Provide sufficient heat and ventilation in areas where work is being performed, so as to allow to properly set, maintain for minimum 7 days after completion. Typical Home

73 Take precautionary measures necessary to ensure excessive temperature changes do not occur. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Slate: Echeguren Slate Inc., 1620 Innes Ave. San Francisco, CA 94124; Telephone ; Fax Type: [Select one or more as applicable, contact manufacturer for additional options.] African Slate-Multicolor: Multicolor Select, 12 inch by 12 inch by 1/2 inch gauged. Chinese Slate-Aqua Rose: Desert Rose, 12 inch by 12 inch by 3/8 inch gauged. Chinese Slate-Black: Black, 16 inch by 16 inch by 3/8 inch to 5/8 inch. Chinese Slate-Jade Green: Jade, 12 inch by 24 inch by 3/8 inch to 3/4 inch. Chinese Slate-Lotus: 24 inch by 24 inch by 1/2 inch to 1 inch. Indian Slate-Forest Green: Emerald Green, 12 inch by 12 inch by 3/8 inch to 5/8 inch milled. India Slate-White Mara Quartzite: White Quartzite, 16 inch by 16 inch by 3/8 inch to 3/4 inch. Vermont Slate-Black: 12 inch by 12 inch by 1/4 inch gauged. Flooring and Paving Slate: Provide non-slip units with minimum 0.60 coefficient of friction when tested in accordance with ASTM C Reinforced Portland Cement Setting Bed: Portland cement bed conforming to ANSI A and TCA recommendations including separator sheet and reinforcing mesh. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, white, non-staining. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. Sand: ASTM C144, clean, free of substances harmful to stone, mortar, and adjacent materials. Reinforcing: 2 inch by 2 inch, 16/16 gage galvanized steel welded wire mesh. Separator Sheet: Minimum 6 mil polyethylene sheet. Where over waterproof membrane, separator sheet may be deleted. Typical Home

74 Medium (Unreinforced) Portland Cement Setting Bed: High-strength medium bed thickness, Portland cement based formula applications designed specifically for stone setting beds; comply with ANSI A118.1 and Ceramic Tile Institute Acceptable Manufacturer: Custom Building Products/Custom Marble and Granite Adhesive Mortar Mix. Substitutions: Refer to Division 1. Bond Strength: 300 psi, ASTM C 482 (7 day). Compressive Strength: 2500 psi, ASTM C 109 (7 day). Latex Thin Set: Thinset bond coat, consisting of latex-cementitious mortar conforming to ANSI A Acceptable Manufacturers: Custom Building Products. Mapei Corp. Laticrete International Inc. Substitutions: Refer to Division 1. Grout: ANSI A 118.6, latex-cementitious type, uniform in color, resistant to shrinkage. [Special Note: Other grout systems are available, review TCA Handbook.] Acceptable Manufacturers: Custom Building Products. Mapei Corp. Laticrete International Inc. Substitutions: Refer to Division 1. Colored Mortar Aggregate: Ground sound stone, as required to match approved sample. Color Admix: ASTM C979, pure, non-fading mineral oxides designed and mixed to provide uniform color match unless otherwise indicated. Waterproof Membrane: Refer to Division 7. Cleaning and Sealing Materials: Types as recommended by slate supplier. Typical Home

75 Cleaner: HMK Stone & Marble Care ( )/R55 Regular [R63 Acid Base Extra Strength]. Clear Sealer: HMK Stone & Marble Care/S34 penetrating sealer with minimal color change. Color Enhancer Sealer (Matte Finish): HMK Stone & Marble Care/S35 penetrating sealer and color enhancer, with matte finish. Color Enhancer Sealer (Satin Sheen): HMK Stone & Marble Care/S37 penetrating sealer and color enhancer, with satin sheen FABRICATION Provide supplier's standard field sizes as indicated; fabricate special pieces as shown and as detailed on final shop drawings. Field cuts for fit and clearance to match quality of shop cut stone. Provide openings and similar spaces and features as required for contiguous work MIXES Site-Made Setting Mortar: ASTM C 270, Type M mortar; mix and proportion cementitious materials for site-made leveling coats, setting beds and grout. Manufactured Mortars and Grout: Mix and proportion pre-mixed setting beds and grout materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION Examine subbase and supporting structure for stone. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions PREPARATION Prior to installing, ensure surfaces are level. Tolerances: Typical Home

76 Bed Set Slate: Maximum surface variation of 1/4 inch in 10 feet. Thin Set Slate: Maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Ensure surfaces are clean and well cured, and sloped to drains where drains are provided. Do not commence work until surface conditions are within tolerances required for proper installation; apply latex leveling material where necessary to meet required tolerances. Clean stone before setting by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes followed by thorough sponging with clear water; use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic nor harsh fillers or abrasives. Waterproof Membrane: Take special care not to damage waterproofing system. Comply with waterproof membrane manufacturer recommendations for installation of over waterproof membrane GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Do not use material with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations or other defects which might be visible or cause staining in finished work. Execute work with skilled mechanics and employ skilled fitters at site to do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Provide openings and other spaces as shown or required for contiguous work. Close up openings in stone after other work is in place. Use materials and set to match surrounding work. Field cuts for fit and clearance to match quality of shop cut stone. Provide openings and similar spaces and features as required for contiguous work. Set stone in accordance with approved patterns and mock-up. Joint width: Cut to provide uniform 1/4 inch wide joints. [NOTE: Contact slate supplier regarding specific slate selection before specifying tighter joints.] Grouting: Comply with ANSI A with slate supplier recommendations, and with grout manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions BED SET STONE INSTALLATION Typical Home

77 Reinforced Portland Cement Setting Bed: [NOTE: Use reinforced setting for ungauged slate and as needed to prevent cracking in substrate from broadcasting through slate installation.] Apply Portland cement mortar setting bed, install reinforcing mesh, and apply additional Portland cement mortar to proper line and tamp firmly. Lap reinforcing minimum one full mesh and install so reinforcing is approximately in middle of mortar bed. Setting bed shall be of uniform 1-1/4 inch nominal thickness, allowing for variations necessary for indicated slopes. Apply setting bed over areas no greater than can be covered while setting bed remains plastic. Trowel or brush thin layer, 1/32 inch to 1/16 inch thickness, of latex-cement paste over setting bed or to slate. Apply slate in place and beat firmly into straight, uniform joints. Bring surfaces to true level at proper elevation. Complete beating and leveling within one hour of setting; wipe clean with soft damp cloth. Medium (Unreinforced) Portland Cement Setting Bed: [NOTE: Use medium setting bed for ungauged slate and where reinforcing is not necessary.] Thoroughly clean subfloor and moisten without soaking. Apply Portland cement mortar setting bed to proper line and tamp firmly. Setting bed shall be of uniform 1/4 inch to 1 inch thick nominal thickness. Apply setting bed over areas no greater than can be covered while setting bed remains plastic. Trowel or brush thin layer, 1/32 inch to 1/16 inch thickness, of latex-cement paste over setting bed or to back of slate. Apply slate in place and beat firmly into straight, uniform joints. Bring surfaces to true level at proper elevation. Complete beating and leveling within one hour of setting; wipe clean with soft damp cloth THIN SET STONE INSTALLATION [NOTE: USE THIN SET FOR GAUGED SLATE.] Install in accordance with ANSI A 108.5, slate supplier recommendations, and latex admix Typical Home

78 manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions for type of substrate. Latex-Cement Thin Set Floors over Concrete: TCA F113. Latex-Cement Thin Set Floors over Waterproof Membrane: TCA F122. Place in accordance with patterns indicated on Drawings; carefully plan layouts, ensure pattern is uninterrupted from one surface to the next and through doorways. Patterns: [Random irregular; Rectangles; Squares; Random rectangular; Coursed; Other]. Apply latex thin set to back of where necessary to ensure 100% bond between bond coat and substrate; replace tiles which break due to voids between and substrate. Place thresholds level and true to line; in correct alignment with doors and partitions. Neatly cut around fixtures and drains; accurately form corners, base, intersections and returns. Locate expansion joints, control joints, contraction joints, and isolation joints where indicated; where not indicated, provide as recommended by supplier and as approved by Architect. Ensure joints are uniform in width, subject to normal variance in tolerance allowed in slate size; ensure joints are watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or grout. Sound slate after setting, remove and replace hollow sounding units. Allow to set for a minimum 48 hours prior to grouting. Grout to comply with recommendations of grout manufacturer and as specified. Leave completed installation free of broken, damaged and faulty slates CLEANING AND SEALING After completion of work, point open joints and replace defective work. Clean surfaces free of foreign matter upon completion of grouting. Use clean water and stiff bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods which could damage stone. Seal slate and grout surfaces as recommended by supplier for materials and applications involved; comply with sealing material manufacturer's recommendations. Typical Home

79 Echeguren Slate, Inc Innes Ave. San Francisco, CA Phone: Fax: Internet: Typical Home

80

81 SECTION Site Furnishings Precast Concrete Part 1 - General 1.1 SUMMARY A. Types of Precast Concrete work includes 1. Precast Concrete Waste Containers. 2. Precast Concrete Ash urns. 3. Precast Concrete Tables. 4. Precast Concrete Planters. 6. Precast Concrete Benches. 7. Precast Concrete Bollards. 8. Precast Concrete Playground climbers. 9. Precast Concrete Sings. 6. Precast Concrete Custom. B. Setting material, grouts, sealants and caulks. C. Installation of Precast Concrete site furnishings. D. Related work not specified under this section. 1. Installation of steel units to receive Precast Concrete. 2. Installation of concrete substrate to receive Precast Concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1. ASTM C ASTM C ASTM C ASTM C ASTM C ASTM C ASTM C-140 B. Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI) C. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI-318 Typical Home Cast Stone Masonry

82 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings of all precast concrete items showing detail sections and profile for all precast items. Details shall show all reinforcing and special hardware required for fastening. B. Samples 1. Submit (1) sample, 6" x 12" size for each color. a. Color to be selected from Wausau Tile Color Charts. b. Sample to be submitted for color and texture. c. Match existing or Architects sample. 2. Submit copy of quality Assurance and Procedure Program C. Performance Requirements 1. Compressive Strength 5000 p.s.i. 2. Air Content 6-8% 3. Water-Cement Ratio maximum.45:1 D. Certification 1. Suppliers shall furnish certification attesting that materials meet specification requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. PCI Standards: Comply with specified provisions and recommendations of the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute. (PCI) B. ACI Manual of Concrete Practice: Comply with specified provisions and recommendations of the American Concrete Institute. (ACI) C. Manufacturer's Instructions: In addition to specified requirements, comply with precast concrete manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for substrate preparation, material storage, mixing and application, finishing and curing. D. Qualifications: Precast Concrete Manufacturer and Trade Contractor must have a minimum of 5 years of successful experience on projects of similar magnitude and complexity to that indicated project. Manufacturer and contractor to be prequalified by Architect prior to bidding. Failure to prequalify will void bid. E. Manufacturer to supply a written Quality Assurance Program and Procedure Manual. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packaging and Shipping: Precast Concrete to be palletized, delivered in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer identification, including size, piece number, quantities, manufacturer date and inspectors initials. B. Storage and Protection: Precast Concrete to be stored in secure area in original packaging. Protect from damage by other trades. Typical Home Cast Stone Masonry

83 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant delivered product for a period of (2) two years from date of delivery against failure of workmanship and materials. Part 2 - Products 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturer. 1. Wausau Tile, Inc. B. Clarification Note: Drawings and specifications are based on manufacturer's proprietary literature from Wausau Tile, Inc. Other Manufacturer's shall comply with minimum levels of material specifications and detailing indicated on the drawings specified herein. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C-150 specifications for Portland Cement. B. Aggregates: All aggregates to meet ASTM C-33 specifications. Aggregates shall be blended to meet individual project requirements. C. Coloring: Pigments used shall be inorganic, resistant to alkalinity and used per manufacturer's recommendations. D. Reinforcement and Hardware 1. To conform with ACI and Manufacturer's design. 2. Reinforce precast with deformed rods or wire or both as recommended by precast concrete manufacturer. E. Caulks and Sealants 1. Urethane or Polyurethane Sealant 2. Color to be selected by Architect from standard color pallet. F. Sealer: Colorless, pure acrylic water-repellent penetrating sealer MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Sizing Tolerances 1. All units to conform to shop drawings, with a 1/8" tolerance in dimension. B. Precast Surfaces and Edges 1. All exposed edges to have minimum 1/8" chamfer to prevent chipping. 2. Finished surfaces to match approved control sample. 3. All precast concrete finished surfaces to be sealed with a sealer approved by manufacturer. Part 3 - Execution Typical Home Cast Stone Masonry

84 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine areas to receive precast concrete for the following: 1. Defects in existing work or substrate. 2. Deviation beyond allowable tolerances for the substrate. B. Start work only when defects have been corrected by others. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Setting 1. Set accurately as shown on approved shop drawing. Setting methods are: a. Mud Set b. Thin Set c. Weld d. Bolt e. Setting Clips/Hangers f. Tab Set 2. Alignment of precast should be straight and true to all dimensions. It may not vary more than 1/8" in length, height, or width. 3. Install anchors as shown on details. 4. Fill joints between with manufacturer approved caulk or as specified. B. Protection: 1. Upon completion, the work shall be ready for final inspection and acceptance by the owner or owner agent. 2. General Contractor shall protect the finished work from the time the installing contractor completes the work. C. Finish: 1. Overall uniformity in matrix and aggregate. 2. All product to be sealed with approved sealer. Typical Home Cast Stone Masonry

85 5609 Center Hill Ave. Cincinnati, OH Phone (800) Fax (513) Web Site Product Guide Specification Note to Specifier: This specification guide is written in accordance with customary industry standards as they apply to factory fabricated ornamental hand and guardrails systems incorporating tempered glass balustrades. The following must be carefully reviewed and edited by the user to meet the indigenous requirements of the project and local building code requirements. Coordinate this section with other specification sections as well as the architectural and structural drawings. Delete all italicized references to "Specifier when editing this section for your specific project. SECTION ORNAMENTAL GLAZED RAILING SYSTEM Specifier: This section covers Newman Brothers, Inc. pre-engineered, component-based, ornamental glass railing systems. Consult Newman Brothers, Inc. for assistance in editing this section for the specific application. Ph PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre-engineered, component-based, ornamental glass railing system.

86 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS Specifier: Edit the following list of related sections as required for your project. List other sections with work directly related to this section as well. A. Section Metal Stairs. B. Section Pipe and Tube Railings. C. Section Ornamental Metal Stairs. D. Section Finish Carpentry E. Section Glazing 1.3 REFERENCES Specifier: List standards referenced in this section, complete with designations and titles. This article does not require compliance with standards, but is merely a listing of those used. A. ANSI Z Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. B. ASTM E985 for railing related items apply to this section. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Specifier: Edit the following paragraphs as required for the specific application. Consult building code for minimum load requirements. A. Railing system shall be designed to conform to building code and ADA requirements for openings and stress. B. Railing system shall withstand a minimum [concentrated load of 200 pounds applied horizontally or vertically down at any point on top rail] [uniform load of 50 pounds per foot applied vertically down and horizontally, but not simultaneously on top rail]. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including description of materials, components, fabrication, and finishes. Including all structural computations and test reports provided by the manufacturer evidencing compliance with the specifications. C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including elevations, sections, and details, indicating materials, components, sizes, dimensions, tolerances, hardware, fasteners, finishes, options, accessories, and installation. Show details of attaching railing system to supports and structure.

87 D. Samples: Submit manufacturer's samples of standard materials, finishes and colors. E. Manufacturer's Quality Assurance: Submit manufacturer's certification that materials comply with specified requirements and are suitable for intended application. Submit certification that the manufacturer has not less than 5 years experience producing the product specified in this section. Installation of this product will be performed by an approved installer. F. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's maintenance and cleaning instructions. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard one year warranty. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Newman Brothers, Inc. (Econo-Rail) 5609 Center Hill Ave. Cincinnati, OH Phone (800) Fax (513) Web Site: ken@newmanbrothers.com. B. Basis of Design: Drawings and specifications have been prepared based on Newman Brothers, Inc. Econo-Rail System 2 structural glazed railing system. Substitutions must be made and approved not less than 4 weeks prior to the project bid and comply with (C) below. Failure to provide substitution request will result in rejection. C. Substitutions: Comply with Section a. Submit the following with the substitution request. 1. Detailed specifications of construction and fabrication 2. Independent certified test reports indicating compliance with design and performance requirements specified in this section. 3. Full size sample of railing post inch long sample of top railing. 5. Sample of each type of fitting.

88 2.2 ORNAMENTAL RAILING SYSTEM A. Pre-Engineered, Component-Based, Ornamental Railing System: Econo-Rail System Base: [GR350] (for ½ glass or ¾ glass). 2-1/2 inches by 3-1/2 inches, extruded aluminum. 2. Cap Rail: See product data for rail cap designation choices. Specifier: A wide selection of metal and wood cap rails in many styles, sizes, and finishes are available. Consult Newman Brothers, Inc. for additional information and details. a. Material:. b. Style No.:. c. Size:. d. Finish:. Specifier: Consult Newman Brothers for availability of other glass types. 3. Glass: [1/2-inch] [3/4-inch] thick [clear] [gray tint] [bronze tint] [ ] tempered plate glass. a. Glazing Material: ANSI Z97.1 compliant. b. One piece field glazed or two piece factory bonded glass panels, flat or bent horizontally tempered monolithic glass to be free of tong marks. Specifier: The following are options for the Econo-Rail System2 railing system. Delete options not required. 4. Side Mounted Auxiliary Handrail: 1-1/2-inch diameter, Type 304 stainless steel, bronze, extruded aluminum or wood handrail with auxiliary bracket. a. Finish:. 5. Finish: a. Two part aliphatic polyester polyurethane, non metallic: 1) Color:.[Choose from manufacturers standards] 2) Gloss: Semi or High. b. Metal: Directional satin #4 or Polished #8. c. Wood: Sanded, Stained or Final finish in field. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive railing system. Notify Architect if areas or mounting surfaces are not acceptable. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.

89 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install railing system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using experienced installers. B. Install railing system plumb, level, square, true to line, and rigid. C. Attach railing system securely in place using fasteners and compounds supplied or approved by manufacturer. All embedded anchor plates / imbeds and supporting steel shall be provided by another trade and coordinated with the railing supplier. D. Attach railing system to supports approved by project engineer. E. Do not field weld components. F. Use manufacturer's supplied hardware. G. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by Architect. H. Remove and replace defective or damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean railing system promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage glass or finish. C. Do not use abrasive cleaners. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed railing system and finish from damage during work by other construction trades. END OF SECTION

90 WOOD FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Fire retardant treatment for wood, including framing, decking, sheathing and other wood construction, not exposed to weather. Specifier Note: Revise Paragraph below to suit project requirements. Add section numbers and titles per CSI Master Format and specifier s practice. B. Related Sections: Section(s) related to this section include: 1. Rough Carpentry: Division 6 Rough Carpentry Section. 2. Finish Carpentry: Division 6 Finish Carpentry Section 3. Architectural Woodwork: Division 6 Architectural Woodwork Section. Specifier Note: Article below can be omitted when specifying manufacturer s proprietary products and recommended installation. Retain Reference Article when specifying products and installation by an industry reference standard. If retained, list standard(s) referenced in this section. Indicate issuing authority name, acronym, standard designation and title. Establish policy for indicating edition date of standard referenced. Conditions of the Contract or Division 1 References Section may establish the edition date of standards. This Article does not require compliance with standard, but is merely a listing of references used. Article below should list only those industry standards referenced in this section REFERENCES A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title, or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation. Most recent editions should be used. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM D 5516 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Flexural Properties of Fire Retardant Treated Softwood Plywood Exposed to Elevated Temperatures. 2. ASTM D 5664 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Effects of Fire-Retardant Treatments and Elevated Temperatures on Strength Properties of Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber. 3. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA): 1. AWPA Standard P5 Standard for Waterborne Preservatives. 2. AWPA Standard P17 Fire Retardant Formulations. 3. AWPA Standard U1, Use Category System. D. Military Specification (Mil. Spec.): 1. Mil. Spec. L-19140E Lumber and Plywood, Fire-Retardant Treated. Typical Home Wood Framing

91 E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 255 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 723 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. UL Building Materials Directory. Specifier Note: Article below should be restricted to statements describing design or performance requirements and functional, not dimensional, tolerances of a complete system. Limit descriptions to composite and operational properties to extent necessary to link multiple components of a system together and to interface with other systems SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide fire retardant treatment which will perform in accordance with manufacturer s stated performance criteria without defects, damage or failure. Specifier Note: Article below includes submittal of relevant data to be furnished by Contractor either before, during or after construction. Coordinate this Article with Architect s and Contractor s duties and responsibilities in Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section. B. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer s SPEC-DATA product sheet, for specified products. C. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Test Report: Certified test report showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Include in test report certification that fire retardant solution does not contain ammonium phosphate. a. Evaluation Report: National Evaluation Report ESR-1626 or ICBO ER-5755 indicating flamespread, strength, corrosion and hygroscopic properties. 2. Certificate: Certification from treatment plant certifying wood treatment applied complies with Dricon fire retardant treatment by Arch Wood Protection. D. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein. Specifier Note: Article below should include prerequisites, standards, limitations and criteria which establish an overall level of quality for products and workmanship for this section. Coordinate Article below with Division 1 Quality Assurance Section QUALITY ASSURANCE Typical Home Wood Framing

92 A. Wood Treatment Plant Qualifications: Wood treatment plant experienced in performing work of this section which has specialized in the treatment of wood similar to that required for this project and a plant licensed by Arch Wood Protection. Specifier Note: Retain Paragraph below to suit project requirements; otherwise, delete Paragraph below. 1. Certificate: When requested, submit certificate indicating qualification. Specifier Note: Paragraph below should list obligations for compliance with specific code requirements. General statements to comply with a particular code are typically addressed in Conditions of the Contract. Repetitive statements should be avoided. Edit paragraph below to suit project requirements. B. Regulatory Requirements: Provide fire retardant treatment which complies with the following regulatory requirements: 1. New York City MEA ( M, M). 2. FHA Minimum Property Standard # HUD Materials Release Wisconsin Material Approval W. Specifier Note: Article below should include special and unique requirements. Coordinate Article below with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections. Coordinate Article below with related Division 6 Wood & Plastics Sections DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections. B. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer. Specifier Note: Coordinate Article below with Conditions of the Contract and with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Warranty) Section WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions. B. Manufacturer s Warranty: Submit, for Owner s acceptance, manufacturer s standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under the Contract Documents. Specifier Note: Coordinate Paragraph below with manufacturer s warranty requirements. Arch Wood Protection offers a 40 year roof warranty against heat degradation. Consult with manufacturer for warranty requirements. 1. Warranty Period: [Specify term.] years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. Typical Home Wood Framing

93 PART 2 PRODUCTS Specifier Note: Retain Article below for proprietary method specification. Add product attributes, performance characteristics, material standards and descriptions as applicable. Use of such phrases as or equal or or approved equal may cause ambiguity in the specifications. Such phrases require verification (procedural, legal, regulatory and responsibility) for determining or equal products FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT A. Manufacturer: Arch Wood Protection. Specifier Note: Paragraph below is an addition to CSI Section Format. Retain or delete Paragraph below per project requirements and specifier s practice. 1. Contact: 1955 Lake Park Drive, Suite 100 Smyrna, GA Telephone: (770) ; Fax: (770) B. Product Treatment: Dricon fire retardant treatment for wood is produced by licensed treatment plant. Fire retardant chemical shall provide protection against termites and fungal decay, shall be registered for use as a wood preservative by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), shall comply with formulation FR-1 of the current edition of AWPA Standard P17, and shall be free of halogens, sulfates and ammonium phosphate. Treated wood shall have a flamespread of less than 25 when tested in an extended 30 minute tunnel test in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 or UL Corrosion Properties: Fire retardant treated wood in contact with carbon steel, galvanized steel, aluminum, copper and red brass shall exhibit corrosion rates less than 1 mil (0.025 mm) per year when tested in accordance with Fed. Spec. MIL-L , Paragraph Testing: Testing on fire performance, strength and corrosion properties of fire retardant treated wood shall be recognized by issuance of a National Evaluation Services Report. C. Fire Retardant Treatment: Manufacturer s solution for fire retardant treatment of wood. 1. Treatment Standard: Comply with AWPA Standard U1. Specifier Note: Edit article below to suit project requirements. If substitutions are permitted, edit text below. Add text to refer to Division 1 Project Requirements (Product Substitution Procedures) Section PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted. Specifier Note: Edit Article below to suit project requirements. Specify only those species of wood and plywood eligible for UL listing in UL Building Materials Directory. Lumber species include Douglas fir, redwood, hem/fir, spruce/pine/fir, southern pine, white pine, ponderosa pine, western red cedar, red oak, yellow poplar. Plywood species include: Douglas fir, redwood, southern pine, lauan. When using fire retardant chemicals in roof applications, local building code ventilation requirements need to be verified and addressed; coordinate with Division 7 Roofing Sections. Typical Home Wood Framing

94 2.03 RELATED WOOD MATERIALS A. General: Refer to Division 6 Wood & Plastics Sections for related wood materials specified herein. B. Moisture Content: Provide fire retardant treated wood with moisture content as follows: 1. Lumber: Dried to a maximum moisture content of 19% after treatment. 2. Plywood: Dried to a maximum moisture content of 15% after treatment. C. Lumber: Dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Light Framing: a. Studs: [Specify species, grade and dimensions.]. b. Other Light Framing: [Specify thickness and face veneer grade(s).]. D. Plywood: 1. Performance Rated Plywood: [Specify thickness and face veneer grade(s).]. 2. Plywood: [Specify thickness and face veneer grade(s).] SOURCE QUALITY A. Source Quality: Obtain fire retardant treatment from a single manufacturer. Specifier Note: Coordinate Paragraph below with Division 1 Quality Control, Source Quality Control Section. B. Tests, Inspections: [Specify special plant and jobsite testing where required.]. PART 3 EXECUTION Specifier Note: Article below is an addition to the CSI Section Format. Revise Article requirements and specifier s practice MANUFACTURER S INSTRUCTIONS A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer s product data, including product technical bulletins, for fire retardant treatment installation. Specifier Note: Coordinate Article below with Division 6 Wood Sections APPLICATION A. Fire Retardant Treatment: Apply a fire retardant treatment in accordance with requirements of applicable codes and manufacturer s requirements PROTECTION A. Protection: Protect fire retardant treated wood from damage during construction. Typical Home Wood Framing

95 STRUCTURAL INSULATED PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural insulated panels (SIPs) with polyurethane core. B. Structural insulated panels (SIPs) with expanded polystyrene core. C. Structural insulated panels (SIPs) with extruded polystyrene core. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Rough Carpentry. B. Section Wood Framing. C. Section Heavy Timber Construction. D. Section Exterior Finish Carpentry. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C Standard Test Methods for Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block-Type Thermal Insulation. 2. ASTM C Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural Sandwich Constructions. 3. ASTM C Standard Test Method for Shear Properties of Sandwich Core Materials. 4. ASTM C Standard Test Method for Flatwise Tensile Strength of Sandwich Constructions. 5. ASTM C Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 6. ASTM D Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties Of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 7. ASTM D Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 8. ASTM D Standard Test Method for Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 9. ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. 10. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 11. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc: UL Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials C. The Engineered Wood Association: APA PRP Performance Standards and

96 1.4 SUBMITTALS Qualification Policies for Structural-Use Panels. A. Submit under provisions of Section B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product; manufacturer-specific installation instructions for SIP system, including preparation instructions and recommendations, and storage and handling requirements and recommendations. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for SIPs showing layout, elevations, SIP details, product components and accessories. SIP installation drawing shall be reviewed by and sealed by a registered professional engineer qualified to perform such work. Deviations from standard detail and load design values shall be calculated and signed and sealed by a registered professional engineer. D. Samples: Submit 12 inch by 12 inch (305 mm by 305 mm) sample panel. E. SIP Code Compliance Report: Submit manufacturer's ICC-ES evaluation report for the International Building Code. F. Energy Star Rating Approval: Submit manufacturer's certification that panels have been reviewed and approved in accordance with Energy Star Rating as administered by the DOE and are listed as qualifying products. G. Sustainable Design Submittals: LEED Rating System for New Construction. 1. Certificates for Credit MR 5 Regional Materials: Increase demand for building materials and products that are extracted and manufactured within the region, thereby supporting the regional economy and reducing the environmental impacts resulting from transportation. a. Identify each regionally manufactured material, including its source and cost. b. Identify each regionally extracted and manufactured material, including its source and cost. 2. Certificates for Credit EQ 4.4 Low-Emitting Materials - Composite Wood and Agrifiber: Reduce the quantity of indoor air contaminants that are odorous, potentially irritating and/or harmful to the comfort and well-being of installers and occupants. a. Include statement that the composite wood products used in the panel system contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins. H. Sustainable Design Submittals: LEED Rating System for Homes. 1. Certificates for Credit MR2 Environmentally Preferable Products: Increase demand for environmentally preferable products and products or building components that are extracted, processed, and manufactured within the region. a. Provide manufacturer's information which identifies each regionally manufactured material, including its source and cost. b. Provide manufacturer's information which identifies each regionally extracted and manufactured material, including its source and cost. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be experienced in performing work of this section and shall specialize in installation of work similar to that required for this

97 project. All work shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation manuals, and in accordance with manufacturer's panel layout drawings when supplied. B. Source Limitations: Obtain all SIPs from one manufacturer, through one source. Accessories shall be acceptable to the SIP manufacturer. C. Field Measurements: Provide field measurements of structure to SIPs manufacturer prior to fabrication of panels. Coordinate fabrication schedule to comply with project schedule requirements. D. Low-Emitting Materials - Composite Wood and Agrifiber: Provide composite wood products used in the panel system that contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins. E. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Erect panels in area designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship is approved by Architect. 3. Correct mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Ordering: Comply with SIP manufacturer ordering instructions and coordinate lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. B. Delivery: Deliver materials from SIP manufacturer with identification labels or markings intact. C. Unloading: Off-load SIPs from delivery vehicle using method which will not damage SIPs, and as acceptable to the manufacturer. D. Storage: SIPS shall be fully supported using wood stickers, placed in level storage, and prevented from contact with the ground. Stickers shall be placed as recommended by manufacturer. E. Protection: SIPs shall remain in the manufacturer's protective wrap until needed for installation. Unused panels will be rewrapped and/or covered with a suitable covering that will prevent exposure to rain, snow, water, sunlight, dirt, mud, and any foreign matter that may affect SIP performance. F. Subsequent Construction: Coordinate installation of subsequent construction to avoid exposure of SIPs to rain, snow, high moisture, and ultraviolet light and as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer to the greatest extent practical. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Panel manufacturer will provide lamination warranty documents for building Owner acceptance and execution upon completion. Manufacturer's standard forms shall be submitted. PART 2 PRODUCTS

98 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Murus Company (The), which is located at: P. O. Box Rt. 549 ; Mansfield, PA 16933; Toll Free Tel: ; Tel: ; request info (info@murus.com); Web: B. Substitutions: Not permitted. C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section STRUCTURAL INSULATED PANELS A. Murus Polyurethane Structural Insulated Panel (SIP) with Polyurethane Core: A stress skin panel manufactured using the proprietary manufacturing method of Uniform Dispersion Molding (UDM) complying with the following: 1. Panel Type: MURUS OSB-2100PUR Structural Insulated Panel, OSB/PUR Foam Core/OSB. 2. Panel Type: MURUS PTP-2100PUR Structural Insulated Panel, PTP/PUR Foam Core/PTP. 3. Panel Type: MURUS CLAD-2100PUR Structural Insulated Panel, OSB/PUR Foam Core/OSB/Pine Cladding. 4. Panel Type: MURUS T PUR Insulated Panel, OSB/PUR Foam Core/OSB/T Panel Type: MURUS CB-2100PUR Insulated Panel, Cement Board/PUR Foam Core/Cement Board. 6. Panel Type: MURUS CP-2100PUR Insulated Panel, OSB/PUR Foam Core/Sound Board. 7. Panel Type: MURUS PTP/FB-2100PUR Insulated Panel, PTP/PUR Foam Core/FB. 8. Panel Type: MURUS OSB/FB-2100PUR Insulated Panel, OSB/PUR Foam Core/FB. 9. Thermal Characteristics: 4-5/8 inches (117 mm) thick SIP with R Thermal Characteristics: 5-5/8 inches (143 mm) thick SIP with R Thermal Characteristics: 6-5/8 inches (168 mm) thick SIP with R Polyurethane Closed Cell Foam: Minimum of 2.2 pcf (35 kg/cu m) insulation meeting manufacturers quality standards and the following: a. K Factor (aged foam): 148, ASTM C 518. b. Compressive Strength: 23 psi, ASTM D c. Compressive MOE: 682 psi, ASTM D d. Shear Strength: 31 psi, ASTM C 273. e. Shear Modulus: 203 psi, ASTM C 273. f. Flexure MOR: 52 psi, ASTM C 203. g. Flexure Modulus (MD): 587 psi, ASTM C 203. h. Tensile Strength: 37 psi, ASTM D i. Tensile Modulus: 611 psi, ASTM D j. WVT/Perm Inches: 1.0, ASTM E 96. k. Foam Fire Rating: Class 1, UL723. l. Flame Spread: 20, UL723. m. Smoke Developed: 300, UL723. n. Transverse Load: ASTM E 72. o. Combined Axial and Bending: ASTM E OSB: APA performance rating mark shall be identified on the panel, with an Exposure 1 durability rating; minimum physical properties shall be tested and described in APA PRP-108 or NIST PS 2. 7/16 inch (11 mm) thickness unless noted otherwise. 14. Cam Locks: If indicated or required, shall be installed in the panel during the

99 manufacturing process. 15. Wiring Chases: If indicated or required, shall be formed into the panel during the manufacturing process. 16. Sizes: As indicated; Murus polyurethane SIPs are available in sizes from 4 feet by 4 feet to 4 feet by 24 feet (1219 mm by 1219 mm to 1219 mm by 7315 mm). B. Murus EPS Structural Insulated Panel (SIP) with Expanded Polystyrene Core: A stress skin panel manufactured by a pressure lamination process complying with the following: 1. Panel Type: MURUS OSB-2100EPS Structural Insulated Panel, OSB/EPS Foam Core/OSB. 2. Panel Type: MURUS CLAD-2100EPS Structural Insulated Panel, OSB/EPS Foam Core/OSB/Pine Clad. 3. Panel Type: MURUS NB-2100EPS Insulated Panel, OSB/EPS Foam Core. 4. Thermal Characteristics: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) thick SIP with R Thermal Characteristics: 6-1/2 inches (165 mm) thick SIP with R Thermal Characteristics: 8-1/4 inches (210 mm) thick SIP with R Thermal Characteristics: 10-1/4 inches (260 mm) thick SIP with R Thermal Characteristics: 12-1/4 inches (311 mm) thick SIP with R Expanded Polystyrene Core: Minimum of.95 pcf (15 kg/cu m) insulation meeting manufacturers quality standards and the following. Insulation manufacturer shall provide confirmation of Third Party Certification. a. K Factor: 26, ASTM C 518. b. Compressive Strength: 10 psi, ASTM D c. Flexural Strength: 25 psi min, ASTM C 203. d. Tensile Strength: 28 psi min, ASTM C 297. e. Shear Strength: 16 psi min, ASTM C 273. f. Shear Modulus: 440 psi min, ASTM C 273. g. Modulus of Elasticity: 915 psi min, ASTM C 203. h. WVT/Perm Inches: 5.0 max, ASTM E 96. i. Water Absorption (by volume): 4% max, ASTM C 272. j. Maximum Service Temperature: 165 degrees F. k. Foam Fire Rating: Class 1, ASTM E 84. l. Flame Spread: <25, ASTM E 84. m. Smoke Developed: <450, ASTM E 84. n. Transverse Load: ASTM E 72. o. Combined Axial and Bending: ASTM E OSB: APA performance rating mark shall be identified on the panel, with an Exposure 1 durability rating; minimum physical properties shall be tested and described in APA PRP-108 or NIST PS 2. 7/16 inch (11 mm) thickness unless noted otherwise. 11. Adhesives: Manufacturer-approved one part urethane laminating adhesive having an in-use temperature range of - 40 degree F to +250 degree F (-40 degree C to 121 degree C). 12. Wiring Chases: If indicated or required, shall be cut into the panel during the manufacturing process. 13. Sizes: As indicated; Murus EPS SIPs are available in sizes from 4 feet by 8 feet to 4 feet by 24 feet (1219 mm by 2438 mm to 1219 mm by 7315 mm). C. Murus XPS Structural Insulated Panel (SIP) with Extruded Polystyrene Core: A stress skin panel manufactured by a pressure lamination process complying with the following: 1. Panel Type: THE MURUS OSB-2100XPS Structural Insulated Panel, OSB/XPS Foam Core/OSB

100 2.3 ACCESSORIES 2. Panel Type: THE MURUS CLAD-2100XPS Structural Insulated Panel, OSB/XPS Foam Core/OSB/Pine Clad. 3. Panel Type: THE MURUS NB-2100XPS Insulated Panel, OSB/XPS Foam Core. 4. Thermal Characteristics: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) thick SIP with R Thermal Characteristics: 6-1/2 inches (165 mm) thick SIP with R Thermal Characteristics: 8-1/4 inches (210 mm) thick SIP with R Thermal Characteristics: 10-1/4 inches (260 mm) thick SIP with R Thermal Characteristics: 12-1/4 inches (311 mm) thick SIP with R Extruded Polystyrene Core: Meeting manufacturers quality standards and the following. Insulation manufacturer shall provide confirmation of Third Party Certification. a. K Factor: 2, ASTM D b. Compressive Strength: 20 psi, ASTM D c. Flexural Strength: 50 psi min, ASTM C 203. d. Tensile Strength: 50 psi min, ASTM D e. Shear Strength: 25 psi min, ASTM C 273. f. Shear Modulus: 330 psi min, ASTM C 273. g. Modulus of Elasticity: N/A. h. WVT/Perm Inches: 1.5 max, ASTM E 96. i. Water Absorption (by volume): 0.5 percent max, ASTM C 272. j. Maximum Service Temperature: 165 degrees F. k. Foam Fire Rating: Class 1, ASTM E 84. l. Flame Spread: 5, ASTM E 84. m. Smoke Developed: 165, ASTM E 84. n. Transverse Load: ASTM E 72. o. Combined Axial and Bending: ASTM E OSB: APA performance rating mark shall be identified on the panel, with an Exposure 1 durability rating; minimum physical properties shall be tested and described in APA PRP-108 or NIST PS 2. 7/16 inch (11 mm) thickness unless noted otherwise. 11. Adhesives: Manufacturer-approved one part urethane laminating adhesive having an in-use temperature range of - 40 degree F to +250 degree F (-40 degree C to 121 degree C). 12. Wiring Chases: If indicated or required, shall be cut into the panel during the manufacturing process. 13. Sizes: As indicated; Murus XPS SIPs are available in sizes from 4 feet by 8 feet to 4 feet by 24 feet (1219 mm by 2438 mm to 1219 mm by 7315 mm). A. Fasteners: Galvanized ring shank panel nails, or panel screws, as specified by panel manufacturer, for attachment of panel to frames, roofs, and corners. All fasteners to be sized and provided by manufacturer and installed per manufacturer's requirements. Do not use common fasteners. B. Foam Sealant: Compatible with all components of the panel and adjacent materials, provided by manufacturer. C. Construction Adhesive for Installing Dimensional Lumber: Supplied by contractor, acceptable to manufacturer. D. Dimensional Lumber: SPF #2 kiln-dried or better, or pre-engineered equivalent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

101 A. Do not begin installation until foundation or slab have been properly prepared. B. If supporting framing and level line are the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, details, and the drawings that are part of the contract documents for this project. Conflicts between these documents shall be resolved in writing prior to start of construction. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. When storing panels, do not allow them to come into contact with the ground. Stored panels shall remain dry and in the manufacturer's original packaging. Do not allow panels to be stored in an unsupported manner. C. Roof panels shall be fully protected from weather by roofing materials or other means to provide temporary protection at the end of the day, or when rain or snow is imminent. D. Remove and replace insulated wall or roof panels which have become excessively wet or damaged before proceeding with installation of additional panels or other work. END OF SECTION

102 SECTION LAMINATED WOOD DECKING WATERPROOF TRAFFIC MEMBRANE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Traffic membrane, consisting of welded seam PVC waterproofing, over the following surfaces: 1. Balcony decks and roof decks. 2. Walkways, ramps, and stairways. 3. Patios and courtyards. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Scuppers, counterflashings, and fascias. B. Section Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts: Scuppers, counterflashings, and fascias. C. Section Roof drains 1.3 REFERENCES A. CAN/ULC-S107 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; National Standard of Canada. B. CCMC - Technical Guide for PVC Sheet Waterproofing (Exposed to Light Pedestrian Traffic); National Research Council, Canada Construction Materials Centre (CCMC). C. CGSB Roofing and Waterproofing Membrane, Sheet Applied, Flexible, Polyvinyl Chloride; Canadian General Standards Board. D. CGSB 37-GP-55M - Application of Sheet Applied Flexible Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing Membrane; Canadian General Standards Board. E. ASTM E Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings. F. ICC - Acceptance Criteria for Walking Decks; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES). G. UBC Std Test Standard for Determining the Fire Retardancy of Roof-covering Materials; International Conference of Building Officials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section B. Manufacturer's specifications, including data substantiating compliance with physical properties specified. C. Shop Drawings: Installation and seaming plan, showing joints, termination details, and interface with other materials. D. Samples: Two 8-1/2 by 11 inch (210 by 250 mm) pieces showing finish, pattern, Typical Home

103 color, and backing; labelled. E. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions and recommendations, including precautions required for seaming and adhering membrane. F. Installer's Qualifications. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE. A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in providing products of the type specified in this section, with minimum of 15 years documented experience with products in use. B. Installer Qualifications: Trained and currently certified by manufacturer. C. Pre-installation Meeting: Discuss waterproofing practices and precautions applicable to this project. 1. Convene minimum of 7 days prior to start of installation. 2. Require the attendance of: a. Manufacturer's representative. b. Contractor's field superintendent. c. Installation foreman. d. Other trades affected by this work. e. Owner's representative. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged, with seals and labels intact. 1. Label uncured materials, both sheets and canned goods, with date of manufacturer and shelf life. 2. Do not use creased or damaged sheets. 3. Do not use products after end of shelf life. B. Store and handle materials to prevent damage. 1. Place materials on pallets. 2. Prevent creasing of rolled materials. 3. Do not use polyethylene to cover stored materials (canvas tarpaulins are acceptable). 4. Keep containers closed, except when removing materials from them. C. Keep materials at temperature between 40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C) and 80 degrees F (26.6 degrees C); if adhesives are exposed to lower temperature, verify useability with manufacturer before using. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's 10 year warranty for membrane leaks due to a manufacturing defect, covering materials, and/or repair and replacement labor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Provide products of Duradek/Durarail U.S. Inc., 1722 Iron Street, North Kansas City, MO ASD. Tel: (816) Fax: (816) B. Requests for substitution will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section Typical Home

104 C. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Traffic Membrane: Duradek Ultra; polyester reinforced PVC membrane with ultraviolet resistance, for fully-adhered installation with heat-welded seams and perimeter attachment. 1. Sheet Width: 54 inches ( mm).and 72 inches (1828.8mm) 2. Overall Sheet Thickness: inch (1.5 mm). 3. PVC Film Thickness: inch (1.3 mm). 4. Weight: 50 oz/sq yd (1695 g/sq m). 5. Color: As selected by Architect. A Color: Ultra Supreme Granite. B Color: Ultra Supreme Taupe. 6. Coefficient of Friction: a. Dry leather: b. Dry rubber: c. Wet leather: d. Wet rubber: C Color: Ultra Classic Sandstone D Color: Ultra Classic Steel E Color: Ultra Marble Mocha. F Color: Ultra Marble Pewter. G Color: Ultra Marble Slate. H Color: Ultra Supreme Chip I Color: Ultra Heritage Agate J Color: Ultra Heritage Aspen K Color: Ultra Heritage Sienna L Color: Ultra Heritage Sunrise M Color: Ultra Surcoseal Cappuccino N Color: Ultra Surcoseal Grey. O Color: Ultra Surcoseal Greige. P Color: Ultra Surcoseal Latte Q Color: Ultra Surcoseal Suede R Color: As selected by Architect. 6. Coefficient of Friction: a. Dry leather: b. Dry rubber: c. Wet leather: d. Wet rubber: Flammability (ASTM E 108 and UBC Std 15-2): Class A, when installed over non-combustible substrate. 8. Flammability (CAN/ULC-S107): Class A, when installed over non-combustible substrate. 9. International Building Code Compliance: Comply with 2006 International Building Code requirements for walking decks and ICC Acceptance Criteria for Walking Decks, as evidenced by current Evaluation Report prepared by ICC Evaluation Service (ICC-ES). B. Surface Conditioners, Adhesives, Sealants, Fillers, and Cleaners: As specified or provided by membrane manufacturer. C. Perimeter Fasteners: Mechanical fastening devices furnished by membrane manufacturer; color coordinated to membrane color. Typical Home

105 D. PVC Coated Metal, Scuppers, Overflow Drains, Roof Drains, and Trims furnished by membrane manufacturer. E. Adjacent Flashings: Specified in other sections; installed by others. PART 2 EXECUTION 2.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work and conform to membrane manufacturer's requirements. B. Verify that deck is: 1. Secure, well supported, solid, and in accordance with local code structural requirements. ¼ inch in 12 inches is recommended for all new construction. 2. Clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, and projections, properly sloped to drains, valleys, or eaves. 3. Dry and free of ice and snow. C. Verify that adjacent precast deck members are flush within 1/4 inch (6 mm) vertical variation, with grout keys filled flush. D. Notify the Architect of any conditions that would prevent satisfactory completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 2.2 PREPARATION A. Do not proceed with installation until substrate preparation is complete. B. Coordinate timing of installation to avoid construction traffic over completed traffic membrane surfaces. C. Wood Deck: Fill joints, knot holes, voids, and low areas with filler and sand smooth. D. Wood Deck: Cover with cementitious board meeting requirements of Class A approved application. Fill joints, knot holes, voids, and low areas with filler and sand smooth. E. Concrete Deck: Fill surface imperfections and variations with leveling compound. Test for and remove surface contaminants. F. Coordinate installation with installation of drains and similar accessories. 2.3 INSTALLATION A. Do not install when temperature is below 25 degrees F (minus 3.8 degrees C) or above 98 degrees F (36.6 degrees C). Do not install when winds are gusting over 30 mph (48.3 kph). B. Do not dilute primers, adhesives, coatings, or sealants. C. Install membrane with minimum number of seams possible. Overlap seams 3/4 inch (19 mm), to shed water; heat-weld all seams. D. Adhere membrane to substrate. E. Mechanically fasten all perimeter edges and penetrations. F. Install flashings and accessories. Seal around all penetrations, drains, and edges. Typical Home

106 2.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean soiled areas in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Repair damaged areas to match original materials. 2.5 PROTECTION A. Protect finished work from traffic using durable temporary materials. END OF SECTION Typical Home

107 SECTION ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 GERERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Woodwork for general architectural purposes RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Gypsum Board B. Section Cold Formed Metal Framing C. Section Lumber 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM E-84 Method of test for surface burning characteristics of building materials B. BHMA Builder s Hardware Manufacturers Associations C. AWI Quality Standards (Architectural Woodwork Institute) 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All products are to be packaged at the factory in heavy cardboard cartons. B. All shipments to the job site shall be made on wooden pallets ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. So not use in high humidity areas. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Decorative Interior Wall Surface: Myriad System 2.0 specially machine decorative wall panels with no perimeter frame, installed utilizing a hidden wall rail attachment system to allow for secure attachment and proper alignment. B. Exposed Application Hardware: Clear satin Anodized Aluminum, Black Satin Anodized Aluminum

108 C. Marlite Finish: Faux Prints finished with modified acrylic topcoat, panels ¼ thick D. High Pressure Laminate: 9/16 thick, laminate face E. Wood Veneer: Wood fiber, furniture grade catalyzed finish. ¾ thick panels. F. Panel Size: Normal, 24 x ACCESSORIES A. Panel Frames Myriad System 1.0 B. Trim Profiles Myriad Linear Trim System C. Trim Finish specific to each case 2.03 FABRICATION A. Factory finished and ready to install. B. Panel edges can be cut in field. PART 3 EXECTURION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prepare wall: make sure it is smooth and flat, place drop cloths on existing surfaces. B. Let Panels equalize to the moisture and temperature in the room prior to installation INSTALLATION A. Follow the manufacturer s instructions. B. Avoid contamination of the panel faces with adhesives, solvents or cleaners during installation. END OF SECTION

109 Section Wood Trim PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Durable wood products for the following applications: 1. Trim boards 2. Fascia 3. Window sills 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Exterior Finish Carpentry B. Section Standing and Running Trim C. Section Painting 1. Field finish coat over prepared wood substrate 1.3 REFERENCES A. Armor Coat Trim & Fascia Material Safety Data Sheet B. ASTM D 3359 Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test C. ASTM D 5007 Standard Test Method for Wet-to-Dry Hiding Change D. ASTM D 4587 Standard Practice for Light/Water Exposure of Paint 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of section B. Product Data: Manufacturer s data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations 3. Installation instructions C. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, at least 6 inches (150 mm) long, representing actual product and color 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Typical Home Wood Trim

110 A. Installer Qualifications 1. Installer shall be licensed, registered or otherwise acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to install exterior building products 2. Minimum 2 years experience in installation of product type specified 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspect the materials on delivery to assure specified products have been received. Store products in dry location, under cover and off the ground 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer s absolute limits 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer warrants product will be free from manufacturing defects for a period of 20 years from date of installation and free from mold and mildew for a period of 6 months from the date of purchase from the manufacturer PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Belco Forest Products, which is located at: 1890 E Johns Prairie Rd; Shelton, WA 98584; Toll Free Tel: ; Tel: ; Web: B. Substitutions: Not permitted C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section PRODUCTS A. Trim boards & fascia 1. Sizes a. 1 x 2, actual 11/16 x 1-1/2 (17.5mm x 38mm) b. 1 x 3, actual 11/16 x 2-1/2 (17.5mm x 63.5mm) c. 1 x 4, actual 11/16 x 3-1/2 (17.5mm x 89mm) d. 1 x 6, actual 11/16 x 5-1/2 (17.5mm x 140mm) e. 1 x 8, actual 11/16 x 7-1/4 (17.5mm x 184mm) Wood Trim Typical Home

111 f. 1 x 10, actual 11/16 x 9-1/4 (17.5mm x 235mm) g. 1 x 12, actual 11/16 x 11-1/4 (17.5mm x 286mm) h. 5/4 x 3, actual 1-1/16 x 2-1/2 (27mm x 63.5mm) i. 5/4 x 4, actual 1-1/16 x 3-1/2 (27mm x 89mm) j. 5/4 x 5, actual 1-1/16 x 4-1/2 (27mm x 114mm) k. 5/4 x 6, actual 1-1/16 x 5-1/2 (27mm x 140mm) l. 5/4 x 8, actual 1-1/16 x 7-1/4 (27mm x 184mm) m. 5/4 x 10, actual 1-1/16 x 9-1/4 (27mm x 235mm) n. 5/4 x 12, actual 1-1/16 x 11-1/4 (27mm x 286mm) o. 2 x 2, actual 1-7/16 x 1-7/16 (36.5mm x 36.5mm) p. 2 x 3, actual 1-7/16 x 2-1/2 (36.5mm x 63.5mm) q. 2 x 4, actual 1-7/16 x 3-1/2 (36.5mm x 89mm) r. 2 x 6, actual 1-7/16 x 5-1/2 (36.5mm x 140mm) s. 2 x 8, actual 1-7/16 x 7-1/4 (36.5mm x 184mm) t. 2 x 10, actual 1-7/16 x 9-1/4 (36.5mm x 235mm) u. 2 x 12, actual 1-7/16 x 11-1/4 (36.5mm x 286mm) 2. Milled Textures a. Comb face (AKA Rougher Headed Face or Broken Knife Comb Face ) b. Comb 4 sides c. Resawn face d. Resawn 1 face, 1 edge e. Smooth 4 sides 3. Finishes a. Primed b. Custom colored top coat B. Window sills 1. Sizes a. 2 x 3, actual 1-7/16 x 2-1/2 (36.5mm x 63.5mm) b. 2 x 4, actual 1-7/16 x 3-1/2 (36.5mm x 89mm) 2. Milled Textures a. Smooth 4 sides with drip edge 3. Finishes a. Primed b. Custom colored top coat 2.3 MATERIALS A. Non-pressure treated wood 1. Species: Spruce-Pine-Fir (SPF) and Hem Fir (HF) 2.4 TREATMENT Typical Home Wood Trim

112 A. 2-Coat Priming Process 1. First Coat The Platinum Protection Package Sprayed on a. Termite and fungal decay protection is provided by borate solution b. Mold and mildew protection is provided by an inhibitor solution 2. Second Coat Primer Flood coat a. Water-borne acrylic primer b. 6 mils wet, back brushed, oven dried, 3 mils dry B. Custom Top Coating through Belco Color Shield PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 1. Acrylic paints, sprayed on A. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of exterior finish carpentry. Do not begin installation until substrates have been prepared B. Coordinate with responsible party to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly, prior to installation B. Examine, clean, and repair as necessary, any substrate conditions that would be detrimental to proper installation C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for substrate under the project conditions 3.3 INSTALLATION Wood Trim Typical Home

113 A. Install in accordance with manufacturer s instructions 1. Comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage B. Touch up all field cuts before installing 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before substantial completion END OF SECTION Typical Home Wood Trim

114 SECTION Board Insulation PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's product literature including specified physical properties. B. Installation instructions. C. Certification that product complies with specification requirements and is suitable for the use intended. D. Manufacturer's 30 Year Thermal Performance Warranty QUALITY ASSURANCE A. CAVITYMATE Insulation shall not be produced with, or contain, any of the United States EPA regulated CFC Compounds listed in the Montreal Protocol of the United Nations Environmental Program PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protect insulation from physical damage. B. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection. C. Handle boards carefully so corners are not broken off or boards otherwise damaged WARRANTY A. Provide written warranty that the actual thermal resistance of the extruded polystyrene insulation will not vary by more that 10% from its published thermal resistance. B. Warranty period is 30 years after date insulation is purchased. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION A. Material Properties: 1. Rigid closed-cell extruded polystyrene thermal board insulation. 2. Comply with ASTM C , Type IV, density 1.6 lb/cu. ft. min., compressive resistance 25 psi (ASTM D ) Typical Home

115 3. Thermal resistance: R-12; 5-year aged R-values of 6.0 and 5.6 min. F-ft 2 -h/btu/inch at 40 F and 75 F respectively (ASTM C ). 4. Water Absorption: Max. 0.1% by volume (ASTM C (96)). 5. Surface Burning Characteristics: a. Flame Spread: 15. b. Smoke Developed: 165. *** Select appropriate board thickness below: *** B. Thickness: nominal 1-5/8" (R-10). *** or *** B. Thickness: nominal 2" (R-12). C. Acceptable manufacturer's product: The Dow Chemical Company "STYROFOAM CAVITYMATE Ultra Brand" Insulation ADHESIVE A. Adhesive: type recommended by insulation manufacturer. B. Acceptable manufacturer's products: 1. ChemRex, Inc. "Contech Brand PL300 Foam Board Adhesive". 2. ChemRex, Inc. "Contech Brand Premium Foam Board Adhesive". 3. Dacar Products, Inc. "Foamgrab PS". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that masonry joints are stuck flush and that other conditions are satisfactory for proper installation. B. Remove concrete fins and mortar projections that interfere with placement of insulation boards INSTALLATION A. Apply 2" diameter daubs of adhesive spaced approximately 12" o.c. both ways on the inside face of insulation board. B. Butter all edges of insulation board with adhesive to provide continuous vapor barrier. C. Fit insulation between wall ties and other obstructions with joints staggered and edges butted tightly. 1. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction. 2. Wedge insulation from outside wythe of construction with small fragments of masonry materials spaced 24" o.c. both ways. 3. Make insulation continuous. Fill all voids CLEAN-UP A. Remove and dispose of excess insulation, wrappings and other waste materials. END OF SECTION Typical Home

116 SECTION INSULATING, EIFS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exterior Insulation and Finish System with Drainage RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Cast-In-Place Concrete. B. Section Precast Concrete. C. Section Masonry Units. D. Section Cold Formed Metal Framing. E. Section Rough Carpentry. F. Section Flashing and Sheet Metal. G. Section Joint Sealers REFERENCES A. ANSI FM 4880 Evaluating Insulated Wall or Wall and Roof/Ceiling Assemblies; Plastic Interior Finish Materials; Plastic Exterior Building Panels; Wall/Ceiling Coating Systems; Interior or Exterior Finish Systems. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM B (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6061) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. 2. ASTM C Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 3. ASTM C Standard Test Method for Flatwise Tensile Strength of Sandwich Constructions. 4. ASTM C Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. 5. ASTM C (formerly C 79) Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. 6. ASTM D (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6191) Standard Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive. 7. ASTM D (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6201) Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity. 8. ASTM D Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Fire- Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing 9. ASTM D Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 10. ASTM D Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser. 11. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Project Name / / Masonry Mortar

117 Building Materials. 12. ASTM E (formerly EIMA Std ) Standard Test Method for Freeze-Thaw Resistance of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) and Water-Resistive Barrier Coatings. 13. ASTM E (formerly EIMA Std ) Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Class PB and PI Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS). 14. ASTM G (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6151) Standard Practice for Operating-Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials. C. Dryvit Standards: 1. DS131 - Dryvit Expanded Polystyrene Insulation Board Specification. 2. DS151 - Custom Brick Polymer System Specifications for Use On Vertical Walls. 3. DS152 - Dryvit Cleaning and Recoating. 4. DS153 - Dryvit Expansion Joints and Sealants. 5. DS159 - Dryvit Water Vapor Transmission. 6. DS456 - Rapidry DM or DS457, Rapidry DM Data Sheets. 7. DS494 - Dryvit AquaFlash System PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Air/Water-Resistive Barrier Coating - System Construction: 1. Tensile Bond (ASTM C 297/E 2134): Minimum 104 kpa (15 psi). 2. Freeze-thaw (ASTM E 2485): No deleterious effects after 10 cycles. 3. Water Resistance (ASTM D 2247): No deleterious effects after 14 days exposure. 4. Water Vapor Transmission (ASTM E 96 Proc. B): Vapor Permeable. 5. Air Leakage (ASTM E 283): 0.6 l/min/m2 (0.002 cfm/sqft). 6. Structural Performance (ASTM E 1233 Proc. A): Minimum 10 positive cycles at 1/240 deflection; No cracking in field, at joints or interface with flashing. 7. Racking (ASTM E 72): No cracking in field, at joints or interface with flashing at net deflection of 3.2 mm (1/8 inch). 8. Restrained Environmental: 5 cycles; No cracking in field, at joints or interface with flashing. 9. Water Penetration (ASTM E 331): No water penetration beyond the inner-most plane of the wall after 15 minutes at 137 Pa (2.86 psf). 10. UV Exposure (ASTM D 2898): 210 hours of exposure. 11. Accelerated Aging: 25 cycles of drying and soaking. 12. Hydrostatic Pressure Test (AATCC 127): 21.6" water column for 5 hours. 13. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E 84): Flame Spread - Less Than 25; Smoke Developed - Less than 450. B. Flashing Materials- System Construction: 1. l Sealability: (ASTM D 1970) - No water penetration. 2. Tensile Strength: (ASTM D a and AC148) - Minimum 7.1 kg/cm (39.9 lb/in) for aged specimen. 3. Pliability: (AC148 Sec. 4.6) - No cracking when bent over 3 mm (1/8 in) Typical Home/ Exterior insulation and Finish System

118 mandrel at 0 degrees C (32 F). 4. Water Resistance: (AATCC Method 167 and AC148 Section 4.5) - No water leakage after UV exposure and accelerated aging cycling. 5. Ultraviolet Exposure: (ICC ES AC148) hrs - No deleterious effects when viewed under 5x magnification. 6. Accelerated Aging Cycling: (Sec ICC ES AC148) - 25 cycles: 3 hrs at 49 Degrees C (120 F), 3 hrs water immersion, 18 hrs air dry: No visible damage under 5x magnification. 7. Accelerated Aging Cycling: (Sec ICC ES AC148): - 25 cycles: 3 hrs at 49 Degrees C (120 F), 3 hrs water immersion, 18 hrs at -40 Degrees C (-40 F). No visible damage under 5x magnification. C. Durability- System Construction: 1. Abrasion Resistance (ASTM D 968): No deleterious effects after 1000 liters (1056 quarts). 2. Accelerated Weathering (ASTM G155 Cycle 1): No deleterious effects after 5000 hours. 3. Accelerated Weathering (ASTM G 154 Cycle 1 (QUV): No deleterious effects after 5000 hours. 4. Freeze-Thaw (ASTM E 2485): No deleterious effects after 90 cycles. 5. Mildew Resistance (ASTM D 3273): No growth during 60 day exposure period. 6. Water Resistance (ASTM D2247): No deleterious effects after 42 days exposure. 7. Taber Abrasion (ASTM D 4060): Passed 1000 cycles. 8. Salt Spray Resistance (ASTM B 117): No deleterious effects after 1000 hours exposure. 9. Transverse Wind Load (ASTM E 330): Minimum 4.3 kpa (90 psf), 16 in o.c. framing, 1/2 inch (13mm) sheathing screw attached at 203 mm (8 in) o.c. 10. Tensile Bond (ASTM C 297): Minimum kpa (31 psi) 11. Water Penetration (ASTM E 331): Passed 15 minutes at 137 Pa (2.86 psf). 12. Water Vapor Transmission (ASTM E 96 Proc. B). a. EPS: 5 Perm-inch. b. Base Coat: 40 Perms. c. Finish: 40 Perms. 13. Drainage Efficiency (ASTM E 2273): Minimum Drainage Efficiency of 90 percent. D. Fire Performance - System Construction: 1. Fire Resistance (ASTM E 119): Passed 1 hour. 2. Ignitability (NFPA 268): No ignition at 12.5 kw/m2 at 20 minutes. 3. Intermediate Multi-Story Fire Test (NFPA 285): a. Resist flame propagation over the exterior surface. b. Resist vertical spread of flame within combustible core/component of panel from one story to the next. c. Resist vertical spread of flame over the interior surface from one story to the next. d. Resist lateral spread of flame from the compartment of fire origin to adjacent spaces. Project Name / / Masonry Mortar

119 1.05 SUBMITTALS 4. Full Scale Multi-Story (ANSI FM 4880): Resist flame propagation over the exterior surface A. Submit under provisions of Section B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Submit Manufacturer's drawings detailing the approved methods for flashing and waterproofing all conditions applicable to the work listed in this section. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All products specified in this section will be provided by a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten (10) years experience. B. Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single installer with a minimum of five (5) years demonstrated experience in installing products of the same type and scope as specified. C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by Architect. 3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction WARRANTY A. At project closeout, provide to the owner or owners representative an executed copy of the manufacturer's moisture drainage and limited materials warranty against defective material. PART 2 PRODUCTS Typical Home/ Exterior insulation and Finish System

120 1.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Dryvit Systems, Inc B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section AIR / WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIERS A. Dryvit Backstop NT Smooth: Flexible, smooth surfaced, polymer-based noncementitious coating used as a water-resistive barrier and air barrier over exterior substrates. B. Dryvit Backstop NT Textured: Flexible, Textured, polymer-based non-cementitious coating used as a water-resistive barrier and air barrier over exterior substrates. C. Dryvit Grid Tape: An open weave fiberglass mesh tape with pressure sensitive adhesive for reinforcing sheathing joints and exposed sheathing edges. 1. Roll Size: 102 mm (4 inches) wide by 91 m (100 yards) long FLASHING MATERIALS A. AquaFlash: Flexible, water-based polymer material used to seal substrates around windows, doors and other openings. B. AquaFlash Mesh: Reinforcing mesh for use in conjunction with AquaFlash: 1. Roll Size: 102 mm (4 in) wide by 54.9 m (180 ft) long. 2. Roll Size: 152 mm (6 in) wide by 54.9 m (180 ft) long. 3. Roll Size: 229 mm (9 in) wide by 54.9 m (180 ft) long. C. Dryvit Flashing Tape : A high density polyethylene film backed with a rubberized asphalt adhesive 1. Roll Size: 102 mm (4 in) wide by 23 m (75 ft) long. 2. Roll Size: 152 mm (6 in) wide by 23 m (75 ft) long. 3. Roll Size: 229 mm (9 in) wide by 23 m (75 ft) long. D. Dryvit Flashing Tape Surface Conditioner: Water-based surface conditioner and adhesion promoter for Dryvit Flashing Tape INSULATION BOARD A. Expanded Polystyrene meeting Dryvit Specification for Insulation Board, DS Thickness: inch ( mm). B. Insulation manufacturer selected from those listed by Dryvit Systems, 1nc INSULATION ADHESIVE AND BASE COAT A. Primus: 100 percent polymer-based product, which is field mixed in a 1 to 1 ratio by weight with Portland cement to produce Primus mixture. 1. Working Time: 1 hour. 2. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96 - Permeable to water vapor. Project Name / / Masonry Mortar

121 3. Bond Strength: Exceeds the cohesive strength of insulation board. B. Genesis: fiber-reinforced, 100 percent acrylic-based product which, when mixed with Portland cement, provides a high-build, exceptionally easy to trowel adhesive, base, texture or leveling coat. 1. Working Time: 2 to 4 hours. 2. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96 - Permeable to water vapor. 3. Bond Strength: Exceeds the cohesive strength of insulation board. C. Genesis FM: 100 percent acrylic-based product which, when mixed with Portland cement, provides an exceptionally easy to trowel adhesive and base coat. 1. Working Time: 2 to 4 hours. 2. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96 - Permeable to water vapor. 3. Bond Strength: Exceeds the cohesive strength of insulation board. 4. Full Scale Inside Corner Test: ANSI-FM Passed - unlimited height. D. NCB: Water-based tintable acrylic base coat applied without the addition of Portland cement. Flexible and crack-resistant base and grout coat. 1. Working Time: N/A - May be re-tempered with additional water. 2. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96 - Permeable to water vapor. 3. Bond Strength: Exceeds the cohesive strength of insulation board. E. Primus DM: Dry blend, polymer-based adhesive and base coat. Field mixed to produce a high performance, easily applied adhesive and base coat. 1. Working Time: 1 to 3 hours. 2. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96 - Permeable to water vapor. 3. Bond Strength: Exceeds the cohesive strength of insulation board. F. Genesis DM: High-performance, fiber-reinforced dry blend adhesive and base coat specifically formulated for Dryvit systems. 1. Working Time: 1 to 3 hours. 2. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96 - Permeable to water vapor. 3. Bond Strength: Exceeds the cohesive strength of insulation board. G. Genesis DMS: Sprayable, dry blend, polymer-modified adhesive and base coat for use with Dryvit systems. 1. Working Time: 2 to 3 hours. 2. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96 - Permeable to water vapor. 3. Bond Strength: Exceeds the cohesive strength of insulation board. H. Rapidry DM 35-50: Fast setting, polymer-modified, fiber-reinforced, cement-based, dry blend adhesive and base coat for use with Dryvit systems during colder weather. 1. Working Time: 45 to 60 minutes. 2. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96 - Permeable to water vapor. 3. Bond Strength: Exceeds the cohesive strength of insulation board FINISH COAT A. Standard DPR (Dirt Pickup Resistance) Finish: 100 percent acrylic-based coating offered in standard and custom colors. The finishing touch that adds lasting color and texture to exterior and interior walls. Typical Home/ Exterior insulation and Finish System

122 1. Color:. 2. Color: To be selected by the Architect from Manufacturer's available color choices. 3. Texture: Quarzputz DPR. 4. Texture: Freestyle DPR. 5. Texture: Sandpebble DPR. 6. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96 - Permeable to water vapor. 7. Water Resistance: ASTM D day exposure; No deleterious effects. 8. Salt Spray Resistance: ASTM B hours; No deleterious effects. 9. Mildew Resistance: ASTM D Days, no growth. 10. Flame Spread: ASTM E 84 - Less than 25, Class I. B. E Finish: lightweight, premixed 100 percent acrylic-based coating, offered in standard and custom colors. 1. Color:. 2. Color: To be selected by the Architect from Manufacturer's available color choices. 3. Texture: Quarzputz E. 4. Texture: Sandpebble E. 5. Texture: Sandpebble Fine E. 6. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96 - Permeable to water vapor. 7. Water Resistance: ASTM D day exposure; No deleterious effects. 8. Accelerated Weathering: ASTM G hours; No deleterious effects. 9. Wet Scrub Resistance: ASTM D ,000 scrub cycles; No cracking, checking or loss of film integrity. 10. Mildew Resistance: ASTM D Days, no growth. 11. Flame Spread: ASTM E 84 - Less than 25, Class I. 12. Mandrel Bend: ASTM D Passed 1/2 inch at 21 C (70 F) and 1 inch at 4 C (40 F). C. FM Finish: Water-based, acrylic coating with integral color and texture, formulated with PMR chemistry: 1. Color:. 2. Color: To be selected by the Architect from Manufacturer's available color choices. 3. Texture: Sandpebble FM D. Specialty Finish: Factory mixed, water-based acrylic. 1. Color:. 2. Color: To be selected by the Architect from Manufacturer's available color choices. 3. Texture: Ameristone - Multi-colored quartz aggregate with a flamed granite appearance. 4. Texture: Custom Brick - Finish used in conjunction with a proprietary template system to create the look of stone, brick, slate or tile. 5. Texture: TerraNeo - Finish with large mica chips and multi-colored quartz aggregates. 6. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96 - Permeable to water vapor. 7. Water Resistance: ASTM D day exposure; No deleterious effects. Project Name / / Masonry Mortar

123 8. Salt Spray Resistance: ASTM B hours; No deleterious effects. 9. Mildew Resistance: ASTM D Days, no growth. 10. Flame Spread: ASTM E 84 - Less than 25, Class I. E. Medallion Series PMR (Proven Mildew Resistance): Water-based, acrylic coating with integral color and texture and formulated with PMR chemistry. 1. Color:. 2. Color: To be selected by the Architect from Manufacturer's available color choices. 3. Texture: Quarzputz PMR. 4. Texture: Sandblast PMR. 5. Texture: Freestyle PMR. 6. Texture: Sandpebble PMR. 7. Texture: Sandpebble Fine PMR. 8. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96 - Permeable to water vapor. 9. Water Resistance: ASTM D day exposure; No deleterious effects. 10. Salt Spray Resistance: ASTM B hours; No deleterious effects. 11. Accelerated Weathering: ASTM G hours; No deleterious effects. 12. Mildew Resistance: ASTM D Days, no growth. 13. Flame Spread: ASTM E 84 - Less than 25, Class I. F. Coatings, Primers and Sealers: 1. Demandit: 100 percent acrylic coating available in a variety of standard and custom colors. Highly resistant to mold and mildew growth and water vapor permeable. 2. Weatherlastic Smooth: Water-based, decorative elastomeric waterproof coating. Applied with an airless spray or roller, Weatherlastic Smooth is based upon a 100 percent acrylic, copolymer elastomeric resin improving elongation and flexibility at low temperatures and after weathering. Mildew, dirt and chalk resistant. 3. Tuscan Glaze: Tintable acrylic stain applied to acrylic or elastomeric Dryvit finish creating an "old world" or "antique" look. 4. Revyvit: Water-based high performance sand-textured interior or exterior coating. Roller or brush-applied and available in a variety of standard and custom colors. a. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96 - Permeable to water vapor. b. Accelerated Weathering: ASTM G Passes 2000 hours. c. Mildew Resistance: Mil Std 810B - Passes. 5. Color Prime: Water-based pigmented acrylic primer providing a flat, uniformly absorbent, color-coordinated surface for application of Dryvit exterior and interior finishes. Color Prime is available in all of our standard colors as well as custom colors. 6. Prymit: 100 percent acrylic water-based primer for improving adhesion and alkali resistance when bonding Dryvit adhesively-attached EIF systems to latex and oil-based painted surfaces. Prymit also improves adhesion to glazed brick and tile. 7. SealClear: 100 percent acrylic emulsion binder that dries to a clear appearance. Resistance to water whitening after fully dried, reduces dirt pickup, and renews the color of weathered finishes. Typical Home/ Exterior insulation and Finish System

124 8. Reflectit: 100% acrylic coating for Dryvit finishes and other approved substrates, and provides a glossy, pearlescent appearance. PART 3 EXECUTION 1.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify that the substrate is: 1. Acceptable for use in conjunction with the work listed in this section. 2. Flat within 6.4 mm (1/4 in) in a 1.2 m (4 ft) radius. 3. Sound and dry with tight connections, no surface voids, projections, or other conditions that may interfere with the Outsulation Plus MD System installation or performance. C. Install all flashings and other waterproofing details prior to commencing work. 1. Inspect metal roof flashing for installation in accordance with Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (ARMA) Standards. 2. Flash openings in accordance with the Contract Drawings or as otherwise necessary to prevent water penetration. 3. Flash all chimneys, balconies and decks and other adjacent work. 4. Install all windows, doors and other surface penetrations in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and the Contract Drawings. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply base coat sufficiently to fully embed the mesh. The recommended method is to apply the base coat in two (2) passes. C. Coat Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System surfaces in contact with textured finishes or base coat surfaces with Demandit or Color Prime. D. Install high impact meshes as specified at ground level, high traffic areas and other areas exposed to or susceptible to impact damage. E. Protect Outsulation Plus MD System materials from inclement weather and other sources of damage until completely dry PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before substantial completion. END OF SECTION Project Name / / Masonry Mortar

125 SECTION WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Weather barrier membrane B. Seam Tape C. Flashing D. Fasteners 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International 1. ASTM C920; Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. ASTM C1193; Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 3. ASTM D882; Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting 4. ASTM D1117; Standard Guide for Evaluating Non-woven Fabrics 5. ASTM E84; Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 6. ASTM E96; Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 7. ASTM E1677; Specification for Air Retarder Material or System for Framed Building Walls 8. ASTM E2178; Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials B. AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists 1. Test Method 127 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test C. TAPPI 1. Test Method T-410; Grams of Paper and Paperboard (Weight per Unit Area) 2. Test Method T-460; Air Resistance (Gurley Hill Method) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section [ Submittal Procedures] [insert section number and title]. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer current technical literature for each component. C. Samples: Weather Barrier Membrane, minimum 8-1/2 inches by 11 inch. D. Quality Assurance Submittals 1. Design Data, Test Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance with indicated requirements. 2. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer s written installation instructions. 3. Manufacturer s Field Service Reports: Provide site reports from authorized field service representative, indicating observation of weather barrier assembly installation. E. Closeout Submittals 1. Refer to Section [ Closeout Submittals] [insert section number and title]. 2. Weather Barrier Warranty: Manufacturer s executed warranty form with authorized signatures and endorsements indicating date of Substantial Completion. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Weather Barriers Typical Home

126 A. Qualifications 1. Installer shall have experience with installation of commercial weather barrier assemblies under similar conditions. 2. Installation shall be in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer s installation guidelines and recommendations. 3. Source Limitations: Provide commercial weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single manufacturer. B. Mock-up 1. Install mock-up using approved weather barrier assembly including fasteners, flashing, tape and related accessories per manufacturer s current printed instructions and recommendations. a. Mock-up size: [10 feet by 10 feet] [insert size]. b. Mock-up Substrate: Match wall assembly construction, including window opening. c. Mock-up may [not] remain as part of the work. 2. Contact manufacturer s designated representative prior to weather barrier assembly installation, to perform required mock-up visual inspection and analysis as required for warranty. C. Pre-installation Meeting 1. Refer to Section [ Project Meetings] [insert section number and title]. 2. Hold a pre-installation conference, two weeks prior to start of weather barrier installation. Attendees shall include Contractor, Architect, Engineer, Installer, Owner s Representative, and Weather Barrier Manufacturer s Designated Representative. 3. Review all related project requirements and submittals, status of substrate work and preparation, areas of potential conflict and interface, availability of weather barrier assembly materials and components, installer s training requirements, equipment, facilities and scaffolding, and coordinate methods, procedures and sequencing requirements for full and proper installation, integration and protection. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section [ Product Requirements] [insert section number and title]. B. Deliver weather barrier materials and components in manufacturer s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Store weather barrier materials as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of weather barrier assembly with installation of windows, doors, louvers and flashings to provide a weather-tight barrier assembly. B. Schedule installation of weather barrier materials and exterior cladding within nine months of weather barrier assembly installation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section [ Warranties] [insert section number and title]. B. Special Warranty 1. Special weather-barrier manufacturer s warranty for weather barrier assembly for a period of ten (10) years from date of final weather barrier installation. Typical Home Weather Barriers

127 2. Approval by weather barrier manufacturer for warranty is required prior to assembly installation. 3. Warranty Areas: [Describe specific areas of work protected and areas of work excluded as required by project conditions]. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. DuPont Building Innovations; 4417 Lancaster Pike, Chestnut Run Plaza 721, Wilmington, DE 19805; TYVEK (8-9835); MATERIALS A. Basis of Design: High-performance, spunbonded polyolefin, non-woven, non-perforated, weather barrier is based upon DuPont Tyvek CommercialWrap and related assembly components. B. Performance Characteristics: 1. Air Penetration: cfm/ft 2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. Type I per ASTM E Water Vapor Transmission: 28 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96, Method B. 3. Water Penetration Resistance: 280 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method Basis Weight: 2.7 oz/yd 2, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T Air Resistance: Air infiltration at >1500 seconds, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T Tensile Strength: 38/35 lbs/in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D882, Method A. 7. Tear Resistance: 12/10 lbs., when tested in accordance with ASTM D Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Flame Spread: 10, Smoke Developed: ACCESSORIES A. Seam Tape: 3 inch wide, DuPont Tyvek Tape for commercial applications. B. Fasteners: 1. DuPont Tyvek Wrap Cap Screws, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: 1-5/8 inch rust resistant screw with 2-inch diameter plastic cap or manufacturer approved 1-1/4 or 2 metal gasketed washer AND/OR 2. Tyvek Wrap Caps, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: #4 nails with large 1-inch plastic cap fasteners. AND/OR 3. Masonry tap-con fasteners with Tyvek Wrap Caps as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: 2-inch diameter plastic cap fasteners. C. Sealants 1. Refer to Section [ Joint Sealants] [insert section number and title]. OR 2. Provide sealants that comply with ASTM C920, elastomeric polymer sealant to maintain watertight conditions. Typical Home Weather Barriers

128 3. Products: a. Tremco 830 b. Tremco Butyl c. Sealants recommended by the weather barrier manufacturer. D. Adhesives: 1. Provide adhesive recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 2. Products: a. Liquid Nails LN-109 b. Polyglaze SM 5700 c. Denso Butyl Liquid d. 3M High Strength 90 e. SIA 655 f. Adhesives recommend by the weather barrier manufacturer. E. Primers: 1. Provide flashing manufacturer recommended primer to assist in adhesion between substrate and flashing. 2. Products: a. 3M High Strength 90 b. Denso Butyl Spray c. SIA 655 d. Permagrip 105 e. ITW TACC Sta Put SPH f. Primers recommended by the flashing manufacturer PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories. 3.2 INSTALLATION WEATHER BARRIER A. Install weather barrier over exterior face of exterior wall substrate in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. B. Install weather barrier prior to installation of windows and doors. C. Start weather barrier installation at a building corner, leaving 6-12 inches of weather barrier extended beyond corner to overlap. D. Install weather barrier in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall surface with subsequent layers installed in a shingling manner to overlap lower layers. Maintain weather barrier plumb and level. E. Sill Plate Interface: Extend lower edge of weather barrier over sill plate interface 3-6 inches. Secure to foundation with elastomeric sealant as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. Typical Home Weather Barriers

129 F. Window and Door Openings: Extend weather barrier completely over openings. G. Overlap weather barrier 1. Exterior corners: minimum 12 inches. 2. Seams: minimum 6 inches. H. Weather Barrier Attachment: 1. Attach weather barrier to studs through exterior sheathing. Secure using weather barrier manufacturer recommended fasteners, space inches vertically on center along stud line, and 24 inch on center, maximum horizontally. AND/OR 2. Attach weather barrier to masonry. Secure using weather barrier manufacturer recommended fasteners, spaced inches vertically on center and 24 inches maximum horizontally. Weather barrier may be temporarily attached to masonry using recommended adhesive, placed in vertical strips spaced 24 inches on center, when coordinated on the project site. I. Apply 4 inch by 7 inch piece of DuPont StraightFlash to weather barrier membrane prior to the installation cladding anchors. 3.3 SEAMING A. Seal seams of weather barrier with seam tape at all vertical and horizontal overlapping seams. B. Seal any tears or cuts as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 3.4 OPENING PREPARATION (for use with non-flanged windows all cladding types) A. Flush cut weather barrier at edge of sheathing around full perimeter of opening. B. Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape. 3.5 FLASHING (for use with non-flanged windows all cladding types) A. Cut [7-inch] [9-inch] wide DuPont FlexWrap a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening. Apply primer as required by manufacturer. B. Cover horizontal sill by aligning DuPont FlexWrap edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs. C. Fan DuPont FlexWrap at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges. D. Apply 9-inch wide strips of DuPont StraightFlash at jambs. Align flashing with interior edge of jamb framing. Start DuPont StraightFlash at head of opening and lap sill flashing down to the sill. E. Spray-apply primer to top 6 inches of jambs and exposed sheathing. F. Install DuPont FlexWrap at opening head using same installation procedures used at sill. Overlap jamb flashing a minimum of 2 inches. G. Coordinate flashing with window installation. H. On exterior, install backer-rod in joint between window frame and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant at jambs and head, leaving sill unsealed. Apply sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer s instructions and ASTM C I. Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4-inch wide DuPont Typical Home Weather Barriers

130 StraightFlash over the 45-degree seams. J. Tape top of window in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. K. On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer s instructions and ASTM C OPENING PREPARATION (for use with flanged windows) A. Cut weather barrier in a modified I-cut pattern. 1. Cut weather barrier horizontally along the bottom of the header. 2. Cut weather barrier vertically 2/3 of the way down from top center of window opening. 3. Cut weather barrier diagonally from bottom of center vertical cut to the left and right corners of the opening. 4. Fold side and bottom weather barrier flaps into window opening and fasten. B. Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape. 3.7 FLASHING (for use with flanged windows) A. Cut [7-inch] [9-inch] wide DuPont FlexWrap a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening. B. Cover horizontal sill by aligning DuPont FlexWrap edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs. C. Fan DuPont FlexWrap at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges. D. On exterior, apply continuous bead of sealant to wall or backside of window mounting flange across jambs and head. Do not apply sealant across sill. E. Install window according to manufacturer s instructions. F. Apply 4-inch wide strips of DuPont StraightFlash at jambs overlapping entire mounting flange. Extend jamb flashing 1-inch above top of rough opening and below bottom edge of sill flashing. G. Apply 4-inch wide strip of DuPont StraightFlash as head flashing overlapping the mounting flange. Head flashing should extend beyond outside edges of both jamb flashings. H. Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4-inch wide DuPont StraightFlash over the 45-degree seams. I. Tape head flap in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. J. On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer s instructions and ASTM C FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify manufacturer s designated representative to obtain [required] periodic observations of weather barrier assembly installation. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect installed weather barrier from damage. END OF SECTION Typical Home Weather Barriers

131 SECTION ASPHALT SHINGLE ROOFING SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Granule surfaced asphalt shingle roofing. B. Moisture shedding underlayment, eaves, valley and ridge protection. C. Associated metal flashing RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Rough Carpentry: Plywood Roof Sheathing. B. Section Wood Decking. C. Section Vapor Retarders. D. Section Sheet Waterproofing. F. Section Flashing and Sheet Metal. G. Section Unit Skylights REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheets, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. B. ASTM B Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. C. ASTM B Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. D. ASTM D Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles (Organic Felt) Surfaced with Mineral Granules. E. ASTM D Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. F. ASTM D Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection. G. ASTM D Standard Specification for Class A Shingles Surfaced with Mineral Granules. H. ASTM D Standard Test Method for Wind-Resistance of Asphalt Shingles (Fan-Induced Method). I. ASTM D Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made from Glass Felt and Surfaced with Mineral Granules. Asphalt Shingle Roofing System Typical Home

132 J. ASTM D Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free. K. ASTM D Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Shingle Underlayment Used in Roofing. L. ASTM D 6757 Standard Specification for Inorganic Underlayment for Use with Steep Slope Roofing Products. M. ASTM E Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings. N. UL Impact Resistance of Prepared Roofing Materials SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's printed product information indicating material characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide published instructions that indicate preparation required and installation procedures. D. Certificate of Compliance: Provide Certificate of Compliance from an independent laboratory indicating that the asphalt fiber glass shingles made in normal production meet or exceed the requirements of the following: 1. ASTM E 108/UL 790 Class A Fire Resistance. 2. ASTM D 3161/UL 997 Wind Resistance. 3. ASTM D QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of manufacturer's application instructions on project site. B. Verify that manufacturer's label contains reference to specified ASTM standards ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Take special care when applying WinterGuard Waterproofing Shingle Underlayment and shingles when ambient or wind chill temperature is below 45 degrees F (7 degrees C). Tack WinterGuard in place if it does not adhere immediately to the deck EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of section B. Provide square feet ( square m) of extra shingles of each color specified WARRANTY. A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Furnish shingle manufacturer's warranty for product(s) of this section as follows: ASPHALT FIBER GLASS SHINGLES Asphalt Shingle Roofing System Typical Home

133 1. CertainTeed Grand Manor Shangle: Lifetime limited warranty. 2. CertainTeed Carriage House Shangle: Lifetime limited warranty. 3. CertainTeed Centennial Slate: Lifetime limited warranty. 4. CertainTeed Presidential Shake TL: Lifetime limited warranty. 5. CertainTeed Presidential Shake TL AR: Lifetime limited warranty. 6. CertainTeed Landmark TL: Lifetime limited warranty. 7. CertainTeed Landmark TL AR: Lifetime limited warranty. 8. CertainTeed Presidential Shake: 50-year limited warranty. 9. CertainTeed Presidential Shake AR: 50-year limited warranty. 10. CertainTeed Independence: 50-year limited warranty. 11. CertainTeed Independence AR: 50-year limited warranty. 12. CertainTeed Hatteras: 40-year limited warranty. 13. CertainTeed Hallmark: 40-Year limited warranty. 14. CertainTeed Landmark 50: 50-year limited warranty. 15. CertainTeed Landmark 50 AR/Architect 80: 50-year limited warranty. 16. CertainTeed Landmark 40: 40-year limited warranty. 17. CertainTeed Landmark 40 AR: 40-year limited warranty. 18. CertainTeed Landmark 40 IR: 40-year limited warranty. 19. CertainTeed Landmark 30: 30-year limited warranty. 20. CertainTeed Landmark 30 AR: 30-year limited warranty. 21. CertainTeed Woodscape 50: 50-year limited warranty. 22. CertainTeed Woodscape 30: 30-year limited warranty. 23. CertainTeed XT 30: 30-year limited warranty. 24. CertainTeed XT 30 AR: 30-year limited warranty. 25. CertainTeed XT 30 IR: 30-year limited warranty. 26. CertainTeed Patriot AR: 30-year limited warranty. 27. CertainTeed XT 25: 25-year limited warranty. 28. CertainTeed XT 25 AR/Seal King 25: 25-year limited warranty. 29. CertainTeed Jet 25: 25-year limited warranty. 30. CertainTeed Classic Horizon: 30-year limited warranty. 31. CertainTeed New Horizon: 30-year limited warranty. 32. CertainTeed Hearthstead: 25-year limited warranty. ASPHALT ORGANIC SHINGLES 1. CertainTeed Custom Sealdon 30: 30-year limited warranty. B. Warranty Supplement: Provide manufacturer's supplemental warranty ("CertainTeed SureStart" or SureStart Plus ) to cover labor and materials in the event of a material defect for the following period after completion of application of shingles: 1. First ten years (Grand Manor, Carriage House, Centennial Slate, Presidential Shake TL, Landmark TL, Presidential Shake). 2. First five years. 3. First four years (Jet 25). C. Extended Warranty Protection (can only be offered by a CertainTeed credentialed contractor): Provide SureStart PLUS protection as follows: 1. 3STAR Coverage (9 years): material and labor costs for repair or replacement. 2. 4STAR Coverage (12 years): material and labor costs for repair or replacement and tear off protection. 3. 5STAR Coverage (15 years): material and labor costs for repair or replacement tear off protection, disposal costs and workmanship defects. Asphalt Shingle Roofing System Typical Home

134 D. Warranty Transferability Clause: Make available to Owner shingle manufacturer's standard option for transferring warranty to a new owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Provide products manufactured by CertainTeed Corporation, Architectural Support Group, P.O. Box 860, Valley Forge, PA Tel: (800) , Fax: (610) B. Substitutions: Not permitted ASPHALT FIBER GLASS SHINGLES NOTE ** Delete shingle types not required for the building project. A. CertainTeed Grand Manor: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161 Class F (110-mph)/UL997 Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; algae-resistant; full two-layer laminated four-tab shingle, plus additional random tabs. 1. Weight: 425 pounds per square (100 square feet) (20.7 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. B. CertainTeed Carriage House: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161 Class F (110-mph)/UL997 Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; algae-resistant; full two-layer laminated four-tab shingle, scallop appearance. 1. Weight: 355 pounds per square (100 square feet) (17.3 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. C. CertainTeed Centennial Slate: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161 Class F (110-mph)/UL997 Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle, algae-resistant; full two-layer laminated four-tab shingle, scallop appearance. 1. Weight: 355 pounds per square (100 square feet) (17.3 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. D. CertainTeed Presidential Shake TL: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161 Class F (110-mph)/UL997 Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; Tri-laminate : three-layer laminated, four-tab shingle. 1. Weight: 480 pounds per square (100 square feet) (23.4 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. Asphalt Shingle Roofing System Typical Home

135 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. E. CertainTeed Presidential Shake TL AR: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161 Class F (110-mph)/UL997 Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; algae-resistant; Tri-laminate : three-layer laminated, four-tab shingle. 1. Weight: 480 pounds per square (100 square feet) (23.4 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. F. CertainTeed Landmark TL: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161 Class F (110-mph)/UL997 Wind Resistance; and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; three-layer laminated four-tab shingle. 1. Weight: 340 pounds per square (100 square feet) 16.6 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. G. CertainTeed Landmark TL AR: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161 Class F (110-mph)/UL997 Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; algae-resistant; three-layer laminated four-tab shingle. 1. Weight: 340 pounds per square (100 square feet) 16.6 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. H. CertainTeed Presidential Shake: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161 Class F (110-mph)/UL997 Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; full two-layer laminated four-tab shingle. 1. Weight: 355 pounds per square (100 square feet) 17.3 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. I. CertainTeed Presidential Shake AR: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161 Class F (110-mph)/UL997 Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; algae-resistant; full two-layer laminated four-tab shingle. 1. Weight: 355 pounds per square (100 square feet) 17.3 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. J. CertainTeed Independence: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D /UL997 Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat Asphalt Shingle Roofing System Typical Home

136 base, ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; three-tab type with random laminated tabs and random shadow line. 1. Weight: 300 pounds per square (100 square feet) (14.6 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. K. CertainTeed Independence AR: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D /UL997 Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle, algaeresistant; three-tab type with random laminated tabs and random shadow line. 1. Weight: 300 pounds per square (100 square feet) (14.6 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. L. CertainTeed Hatteras: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161 Class F (110-mph)/UL997 Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; heavyduty glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; four-tab type, algae-resistant; dual self-sealing strips of CertaSeal Plus sealant; designed to resist blow-off in high wind conditions up to 110 mph. 1. Weight: 235 pounds per square (100 square feet) (11.5 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. M. CertainTeed Hallmark: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161/UL mph Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base, ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; three-tab type with random laminated tabs, textured surface blend, and random shadow line. 1. Weight: 315 pounds per square (100 square feet) (15.4 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. N. CertainTeed Landmark 50: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161 Class D (90-mph)/UL997 Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base, ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; two-piece laminated shingle. 1. Weight: 300 pounds per square (100 square feet) (14.6 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. O. CertainTeed Landmark 50 AR/Architect 80: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161 Class D (90-mph)/UL997 Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base, ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; two-piece laminated shingle, algae-resistant. 1. Weight: 300 pounds per square (100 square feet) (14.6 kg/sq m). Asphalt Shingle Roofing System Typical Home

137 NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. P. CertainTeed Landmark 40: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161/UL mph Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base, ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; two-piece laminated shingle. 1. Weight: pounds per square (100 square feet) (12.9 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. Q. CertainTeed Landmark 40 AR: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161/UL mph Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base, ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; two-piece laminated shingle, algae-resistant. 1. Weight: pounds per square (100 square feet) (12.9 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. R. CertainTeed Landmark 40 IR (Impact Resistant): Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self- Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161/UL mph Wind Resistance, ASTM D b Class F Wind Resistance, UL 790 Class A Fire Resistance, UL 2218 Class 4 Impact Resistance; glass fiber mat base, ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; twopiece laminated shingle, algae-resistant. 1. Weight: pounds per square (100 square feet) (12.9 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. S. CertainTeed Landmark 30: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161/UL mph Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base, ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; two-piece laminated shingle. 1. Weight: pounds per square (100 square feet) (12.0 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. T. CertainTeed Landmark 30 AR: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161/UL mph Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base, ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; two-piece laminated shingle; algae resistant. 1. Weight: pounds per square (100 square feet) (12.0 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. U. CertainTeed Woodscape 50: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161 Class D (90-mph)/UL997 Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; two-piece laminated shingle; algae resistant. Asphalt Shingle Roofing System Typical Home

138 1. Weight: 300 pounds per square (100 square feet) (14.6 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. V. CertainTeed Woodscape 30: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161/UL mph Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; two-piece laminated shingle; algae resistant. 1. Weight: 245 pounds per square (100 square feet) (12.0 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. W. CertainTeed XT 30: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161/UL mph Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; square threetab type. 1. Weight: 245 pounds per square (100 square feet) (12.0 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. X. CertainTeed XT 30 AR: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161/UL mph Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; square threetab type; algae resistant. 1. Weight: 245 pounds per square (100 square feet) (12.0 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. Y. CertainTeed XT 30 IR (Impact Resistant): Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462; ASTM D 3161/UL mph Wind Resistance, UL 2218 Class 4 Impact Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; square three-tab type; algae resistant. 1. Weight: 245 pounds per square (100 square feet) (12.0 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. Z. CertainTeed Patriot AR: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161/UL mph Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; square threetab type; algae resistant. Asphalt Shingle Roofing System Typical Home

139 1. Weight: 235 pounds per square (100 square feet) (11.5 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. AA. CertainTeed XT 25: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161/UL mph Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; square threetab type. 1. Weight: 225 pounds per square (100 square feet) (11.0 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. BB. CertainTeed XT25 AR/Seal King 25: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161/UL mph Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle, algae-resistant; square three-tab type. 1. Weight: 225 pounds per square (100 square feet) (11.0 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. CC. CertainTeed Jet 25: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161/UL mph Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; no-cutout type. 1. Weight: 225 pounds per square (100 square feet) (11.0 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. DD. CertainTeed Classic Horizon: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161/UL mph Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; square three-tab type with random shadow line. 1. Weight: 250 pounds per square (100 square feet) (12.2 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. EE. CertainTeed New Horizon: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161/UL mph Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral granules across entire face of shingle; no-cut-out design with random shadow line. NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on regional product availability. 1. Weight: 245 pounds per square (100 square feet) (12.0 kg/sq m). 1. Weight: 250 pounds per square (100 square feet) (12.2 kg/sq m). Asphalt Shingle Roofing System Typical Home

140 NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. FF. CertainTeed Hearthstead: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self-Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161/UL mph Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral granules across entire face of shingle; square four-tab type with random shadow lines. 1. Weight: 225 pounds per square (100 square feet) (11.0 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards ASPHALT ORGANIC SHINGLES GG. CertainTeed Custom Sealdon 30: Conforming to ASTM D 225 Type III - Self-Sealing; ASTM D 3161/UL mph Wind Resistance; UL Class C Fire Resistance; organic felt base; ceramically colored/uv resistant mineral granules across entire face of shingle, square three-tab type. 1. Weight: 250 pounds per square (100 square feet) (12.2 kg/sq m). NOTE ** Retain one of the following two sub-paragraphs depending on color selection method. 2. Color:. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards SHEET MATERIALS NOTE ** Delete paragraph below and installation instructions in Part 3 if climatic conditions are such that ice dam protection is not required. A. Eaves Protection: CertainTeed "WinterGuard"; ASTM D 1970 sheet barrier of self-adhering rubberized asphalt membrane shingle underlayment having internal reinforcement, and "split" back plastic release film; provide material with warranty equal in duration to that of shingles being applied. NOTE ** Delete WinterGuard types not required for the building project. 1. CertainTeed WinterGuard Sand 2. CertainTeed WinterGuard HT (High Tack, High Temperature) 3. CertainTeed WinterGuard Granular NOTE ** Select underlayment from the following three paragraphs, deleting those not required. The CertainTeed Roofers Select underlayment resists hygro-expansion, significantly reducing wrinkling. B. Underlayment: CertainTeed "Roofers' Select", ASTM D 6757; asphalt-impregnated fiberglassreinforced organic felt designed for use on roof decks as a water-resistant layer beneath roofing shingles. C. Underlayment: ASTM D 4869, asphalt saturated felt. D. Underlayment: ASTM D 226, asphalt saturated felt (non-perforated). E. Waterproofing Underlayment: CertainTeed WinterGuard ; ASTM D 1970 sheet barrier of selfadhering rubberized asphalt membrane shingle underlayment having internal reinforcement, and "split" back plastic release film; Use in low-slope areas (below 4:12, but no less than 2:12); provide material with warranty equal in duration to that of shingles being applied. NOTE ** Delete WinterGuard types not required for the building project. Asphalt Shingle Roofing System Typical Home

141 1. CertainTeed WinterGuard Sand 2. CertainTeed WinterGuard HT 3. CertainTeed WinterGuard Granular 2.05 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Sheet Flashing: ASTM A 361/A 361M; 26 gage (0.45 mm) steel with minimum G115/Z350 galvanized coating. B. Sheet Flashing: ASTM B 209; in (0.63 mm) thick aluminum, mill finish. C. Sheet Flashing: ASTM B 370; cold rolled copper; 16 ounces per square foot (0.55 mm); natural finish. D. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color. E. Tinner s Paint: Color as selected by Architect to coordinate with shingle color ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Standard round wire type roofing nails, corrosion resistant; hot dipped zinc coated steel, aluminum, or chromated steel; minimum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) head diameter; minimum 11 or 12 gage (2.5 mm) shank diameter; shank to be of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing or 3/4 inch (19 mm) into solid wood, plywood, or non-veneer wood decking. B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I or II FLASHING FABRICATION A. Form flashing to profiles indicated on Drawings, and to protect roofing materials from physical damage and shed water. B. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing site conditions under provisions of Section B. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface. C. Verify roof openings are correctly framed prior to installing work of this section. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of ridges, warps, or voids ROOF DECK PREPARATION A. Follow shingle manufacturer's recommendations for acceptable roof deck materials. B. Broom clean deck surfaces under eave protection and underlayment prior to their application INSTALLATION - EAVE ICE DAM PROTECTION Asphalt Shingle Roofing System Typical Home

142 A. Place eave edge and gable edge metal flashing tight with fascia boards. Weather-lap joints 2 inches (50 mm). Secure flange with nails spaced 8 inches (200 mm) on center. B. Apply CertainTeed "WinterGuard" Waterproofing Shingle Underlayment as eave protection in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Extend eave protection membrane minimum 24 inches (610 mm) up slope beyond interior face of exterior wall INSTALLATION - PROTECTIVE UNDERLAYMENT A. Roof Slope 4:12 or Greater: Install one layer asphalt felt shingle underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof and lap minimum 4 inches (100 mm) over eave protection. B. Weather-lap and seal watertight with asphalt roofing cement items projecting through or mounted on roof. Avoid contact of solvent-based cements with WinterGuard INSTALLATION - VALLEY PROTECTION A. For "closed-cut," "woven," and "open" valleys first place one ply of WinterGuard, minimum 36 inches (910 mm) wide, centered over valleys. Lap joints minimum 6 inches (152 mm). Follow instructions of shingle and waterproofing membrane manufacturer INSTALLATION - METAL FLASHING A. Weather-lap joints minimum 2 inches (50 mm). B. Seal work projecting through or mounted on roofing with asphalt roofing cement and make weather-tight INSTALLATION - ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for product type and application specified FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section B. Visual inspection of the Work will be provided by Owner. If conditions are unacceptable, Owner will notify the Architect PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section B. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface. END OF SECTION 6/2004 Asphalt Shingle Roofing System Typical Home

143 SECTION SLATE SHINGLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Slate roofing shingles. B. Moisture shedding underlayment. C. Metal roof flashing. D. Roofing cant and nailing strips. E. Roofing nails. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Rough Carpentry: Framing and Sheathing. B. Section Wood Decking. C. Section Flashing and Sheet Metal. D. Section Unit Skylights. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. B. ASTM B Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. C. ASTM B Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. D. ASTM C Standard Specification for Roofing Slate. E. ASTM C Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. F. ASTM C Standard Specification for Butyl Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Sealant. G. ASTM D Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. H. ASTM D Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection. I. ASTM D Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated and Coated Organic Felt Base Sheet Used in Roofing. Typical Home Slate Shingles

144 J. NRCA MS104 - The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section B. Product Data: Provide distributor's printed information on material characteristics and application limitations. C. Installation Instructions: Include distributor's recommendations for substrate preparation and installation of roofing system and related accessories. D. Shop Drawings: Details for specially configured metal flashing, jointing methods and locations for flashing, and other roofing system details. E. Selection Samples: Pieces of actual shingle, illustrating complete range of colors available, for Architect's selection. F. Verification Samples: Actual shingle in color selected, illustrating full range of color variation to be expected in finished work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing slate roofing of the type specified in this section, with not fewer than three years of documented experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shingles to project site in distributor's unopened cartons, labeled with data indicating source. B. Handle shingles to prevent chipping, breakage, soiling, or other damage. Protect edges with wood or other rigid material. C. Place and stack skids and slate cartons to distribute weight evenly and to prevent breakage or cracking. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. See Section Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide an additional 3 percent of installed shingles, but not less than one full carton, for Owner's use in roof maintenance. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide slate as furnished by Echeguren Slate, Inc.; 1620 Innes Ave. San Francisco, CA ASD. Tel: (415) Fax: (415) Typical Home Slate Shingles

145 B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section C. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.2 SHINGLES A. Slate Shingles: Hard, dense, sound rock, punched or drilled for two nails each, sorted to eliminate any that have been cracked or broken. 1. Source: Obtain slate required for the project from a single quarry, with consistent color range and texture throughout. 2. Grade: ASTM C 406 Grade S1 or upper limits of S2. 3. Grade: ASTM C 406 Grade S2 or better. 4. Grade: ASTM C 406 Grade S3 or better. 5. Thickness: Nominal 3/16 in (5 mm). 6. Thickness: Nominal 1/4 in (6 mm). 7. Thickness: Nominal 3/8 in (9 mm). 8. Thickness: Upon Request. 9. Size: 16 in (400 mm) length by 8 in (200 mm) width. 10. Size: 16 in (400 mm) length by 10 in (250 mm) width. 11. Size: 16 in (400 mm) length by 11 in (275 mm) width. 12. Size: Upon Request. 13. Butt shape: Standard square cut. 14. Butt shape: Upon Request. 15. Color: Black. 16. Color: Blue-black. 17. Color: Grey. 18. Color: Blue-grey. 19. Color: Purple. 20. Color: Green. 21. Color: Red. Typical Home Slate Shingles

146 22. Color: Silver-black. 23. Color: As selected by Architect from standard range. 24. Color: Upon request. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT A. Underlayment: ASTM D 1970, self-adhering rubberized asphalt membrane with high traction surface, internal reinforcement, and back plastic release film. B. Underlayment: ASTM D 2626; one layer of No.40 coated base sheet. C. Underlayment: ASTM D 226; two layers of No.30 asphalt impregnated roofing felt. 2.4 SHEET METAL FLASHING A. Flashing: Terne coated stainless steel; inch (0.38 mm) thick stainless steel core material complying with ASTM A 167, Type 304; coated with lb/sq ft (450 g/sq m) terne alloy on both sides of core metal. B. Flashing: ASTM B 370 copper, cold rolled, 16 oz/sq ft (0.56 mm thick), natural finish. C. Flashing: Lead sheet, 2.5 lb/sq ft (1 mm thick); complying with ASTM B ACCESSORIES A. Nails for Plywood Sheathing: Slater's copper ring shank nail, 11 gage (3 mm), not less than 1-3/4 inches (45 mm) long with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) head; point must penetrate through underside of deck. B. Wood Nailers and Cant Strips: Preservative-treated wood, as specified in Section C. Plastic Cement: ASTM C 1085, one-part non-sag polymerized butyl sealant. D. Sealant: ASTM C 920 silicone, low modulus. 2.6 FLASHING FABRICATION A. Form flashing to profiles indicated on drawings and as required to protect roofing materials from physical damage and shed water. B. Form sections square and accurate in profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that roofing penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and properly flashed to deck surface. Typical Home Slate Shingles

147 B. Verify that roof openings are correctly framed. C. Verify that deck surfaces are dry and free of ridges, warps, and voids. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with shingle manufacturer's recommendations on preparation of acceptable roof deck. B. Broom clean deck surfaces prior to installation of underlayment. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Underlayment: 1. Install underlayment over entire deck surface. At hips, valleys, and ridges, install additional 36 inch (915 mm) width of underlayment, centered on the valley or ridge. 2. Ice Dam Protection: Apply additional layer of underlayment at eaves that are subject to icing and back-up of water. Apply from roof edge to a line that when projected to the horizontal is not less than 24 inches (610 mm) inside of interior wall line. 3. On overhanging eaves that require more than a single 36-inch (915 mm) width of underlayment, overlap not less than 6 inches (152 mm), assuring that overlapped area is located on overhang, outside wall line. B. Sheet Metal Flashing: Install as indicated and in compliance with details and recommendations of NRCA MS Install flashing at all locations where roof intersects other roofs, sidewall or parapet walls, chimneys, ventilators, and similar projections, and at gable edges. 2. Open Valley: Install minimum 20 inch (510 mm) wide open valley metal flashing over 36-inch (915 mm) wide underlayment, with field underlayment lapped over edges of flashing not less than 4 inches (100 mm). Fasten metal with cleats. Overlap metal a minimum of 5 inches (130 mm). 3. Closed Valley: Install closed valley metal flashing over 36-inch (915 mm) wide underlayment by interleaving shingles with minimum 20-inch (510 mm) wide prepared metal flashing sheets. Attach shingles using copper wires to copper straps nailed beyond the top edge of the metal flashing. C. Wood Nailer and Cant Strips: 1. Cant strip: Install nominal 1 inch by 2 inches by 48 inches (25 mm by 50 mm by 1220 mm) wood cant strips at eaves. Apply eave flashing and underlayment over cant strip. 2. Cant Strip: Install nominal 1 inch by 2 inches by 48 inches (25 mm by 50 mm by 1220 mm) pressure-treated wood cant strips directly over underlayment at eaves, spacing 1 inch (25 mm) apart for drainage. 3. Nailers: Install nominal 1 inch by 2 inches by 48 inches (25 mm by 50 mm by 1220 mm) Typical Home Slate Shingles

148 pressure-treated wood nailers as detailed at ridge and hips, directly over underlayment. Protect with additional layer of underlayment before installing hip and ridge accessory. D. Shingles: Comply with details and recommendations of NRCA MS Double shingles at eaves and cornice line. Beginning at eaves, project shingle 2 inches (50 mm), and lay shingles in horizontal courses. Provide at least a 3 in (75 mm) head lap between succeeding courses of shingles and stagger joints between courses a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm). Provide 1 inch (25 mm) projection of shingles at gables. 2. Cut and fit shingles neatly around vents, pipes, ventilators, and other roof projections. 3. Nail shingles so nail heads touch shingle lightly, without producing strain on the slate. 4. Install shingles at ridges and hips in saddle pattern. Lay ridge and hip shingles in plastic cement spread generously over unexposed portions of lower courses and nail in place, covering heads of exposed nails with plastic cement. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Minimize traffic over finished roof surface. If necessary, wear soft-soled shoes and walk on the "butt" of the shingles in order to avoid breakage. END OF SECTION Typical Home Slate Shingles

149 SECTION Sheet Metal Roofing MANUFACTURER Berridge Manufacturing Company 1720 Maury Street Houston, Texas Phone: (800) Outside TX (713) In TX Fax: (713) BERMUDA ROOF SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preformed, prefinished metal roofing and flashings. B. Miscellaneous trim, flashing, closures, drip flashing, and accessories. C. Sealant D. Fastening devices RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05120: Structural Steel Framing. B. Section 05500: Miscellaneous metal fabrication. C. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry. D. Section 07631: Flashing and Sheet Metal Gutters. E. Section 07900: Sealants REFERENCES A. American Iron & Steel Institute (AISI) Specification for the Design of Coldformed Steel Structural Members. B. ASTM A-653 & ASTM A924 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) C. Spec Data Sheet - Galvalume Sheet Metal by Bethlehem Corp. D. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. E. Building Materials Directory - Underwriter's Laboratories, Test Procedure 580. Typical Home

150 1.04 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. The roofing assembly includes preformed sheet metal panels, related accessories, valleys, hips, ridges, eaves, corners, rakes, miscellaneous flashing and attaching devices SUBMITTALS A. Submit detailed drawings showing layout of panels, anchoring details, joint details, trim, flashing, and accessories. Show details of weatherproofing, terminations, and penetrations of metal work. B. Submit a sample of each type of roof panel, complete with factory finish. C. Submit results indicating compliance with minimum requirements of the following performance tests: 1. Wind Uplift - U.L.90 D. Submit calculations with registered engineer seal, verifying roof panel and attachment method resists wind pressures imposed on it pursuant to applicable building codes QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in Architectural Sheet Metal Products with ten (10) years minimum experience. B. No product substitutions shall be permitted without meeting specifications. C. Substitutions shall be submitted 10 Days prior to Bid Date and acceptance put forth in an addendum. D. No substitutions shall be made after the Bid Date DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Upon receipt of panels and other materials, installer shall examine the shipment for damage and completeness. B. Panels should be stored in a clean, dry place. One end should be elevated to allow moisture to run off. C. Panels with strippable film must not be stored in the open, exposed to the sun. D. Stack all materials to prevent damage and to allow for adequate ventilation WARRANTY A. Paint finish shall have a twenty year guarantee against cracking, peeling and fade (not to exceed 5 N.B.S. units). B. Galvalume material shall have a twenty year guarantee against failure due to corrosion, rupture or perforation. C. Applicator shall furnish guarantee covering watertightness of the roofing system for the period of two (2) years from the date of substantial completion. Typical Home

151 PART 2 PRODUCT 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Berridge Manufacturing Company, Houston, Texas. B. Substitutions shall fully comply with specified require-ments SHEET MATERIALS A. Prefinished Metal shall be Hot-Dipped Galvanized - ASTM A Grade C G90 Coating A Gauge core steel or prefinished Galvalume - ASTM AZ-55. B. Unfinished Metal shall be Grade C Galvalume ASTM , AZ 55, "Satin Finish". C. Finish shall be [full strength Kynar 500 Fluoropolymer coating] [Copper-Cote][Lead-Cote] [Champagne] coating, applied by the manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line, with a top side dry film thickness of 0.70 to 0.90 mil over 0.25 to 0.35 mil prime coat, to provide a total dry film thickness of 0.95 to 1.25 mil. Bottom side shall be coated with primer with a dry film thickness of 0.25 mil. Finish shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility, and longevity as specified by the Kynar 500 finish supplier. D. Strippable film shall be applied to the top side of the painted coil to protect the finish during fabrication, shipping and field handling. This strippable film must be removed before installation ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Fasteners: [Galvanized Steel] [Stainless Steel] [Cadmium Plated Steel] with washers where required. B. Sealant: As specified in Section [ ] Type. C. Vinyl Weatherseal Insert FABRICATION A. All exposed adjacent flashing shall be of the same material and finish as the roof panels. B. Hem all exposed edges of flashing on underside, 1/2 inch BERRIDGE BERMUDA ROOF PANEL 1. Panels shall be site-formed with the Berridge Model BP-14 Portable Roll Former in continuous lengths from rake to rake or hip to hip or factory formed to 40' max. 2. Berridge Vinyl Weatherseal strip (Patent No ) to be used along male panel leg. 3. Panels shall have a plank spacing and exposure to the weather of 10 _". 4. Attachment to solid sheathing with concealed 1-1/4" long galvanized ring shank roofing nails and anchor clips spaced at 20" on center. Typical Home

152 5. Where required, panel assembly shall bear Underwriter's Laboratories Label UL90, pursuant to Construction Number 405. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Substrate: 1. Examine plywood or metal deck to ensure proper attachment to framing. 2. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves or projections, level to +/- 1/4" in 20', and properly sloped to [valleys] (or) [eaves]. 3. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips located. 4. Verify deck is dry and free of snow or ice. [Flutes in steel deck to be clean and dry] or [joints in wood deck to be solidly supported and nailed]. B. Underlayment: 1. Verify #30 unperforated asphalt saturated roofing felt underlayment has been installed over solid sheathing and fastened in place. 2. One (1) layer of #30 asphalt roofing felt paper for roof slopes of 3:12 and up, two (2) layers for roof slopes of 1:12-3:12 in moderate climates (check with Berridge). 3. Grace Ice & Water Shield underlayment to be used on all curved applications and on low (less than 1:12) slope or complex roofs per Berridge recommendation. 4. Ensure felt installed horizontally, starting at eave to ridge with a 6" minimum overlap and 18" endlaps. 5. Ensure that all nail heads are totally flush with the substrate. Nails shall be galvanized roofing nails with Berridge Coated Felt Caps INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturers standard instructions and conform to standards set forth in the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by SMACNA, in order to achieve a watertight installation. B. Install panels in such a manner that horizontal lines are true and level and vertical lines are plumb. C. Install starter and edge trim before installing roof panels. D. Remove protective strippable film prior to installation of roof panels. E. Attach panels using manufacturer's standard clips and fasteners, spaced in accordance with approved shop drawings. F. Install sealants for preformed roofing panels as approved on shop drawings. Typical Home

153 G. Do not allow panels or trim to come into contact with dissimilar materials. H. Do not allow traffic on completed roof. If required, provide cushioned walk boards. I. Protect installed roof panels and trim from damage caused by adjacent construction until completion of installation. J. Remove and replace any panels or components which are damaged beyond successful repair CLEANING A. Clean any grease, finger marks or stains from the panels per manufacturer's recommendations. B. Remove all scrap and construction debris from the site FINAL INSPECTION A. Final inspection will be performed by a firm appointed and paid for by the owner in accordance with section END OF SECTION NOTE: Please reference Berridge Manufacturing Company's current Sweet's Catalog 07610/BER, Sweet's BuyLine and 07410/BER for standard product offering with regard to materials, gauges, finishes and colors available. Typical Home

154 SECTION CLAPBOARD SIDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all necessary labor, material and equipment for complete installation of Aside Premium Vinyl Siding and related work as shown on drawings or specified herein RERERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D3679. Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Siding. B. D 256-Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastics and Electrical Insulating Material C. D 635-Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self- Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position D. D 638-Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics E. D 648-Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load F. D 696-Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics G. D 1929-Test Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics H. D 2843-Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or Decomposition of Plastics I. D 3679-Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Siding J. D 4226-Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Building Products K. E 84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples of siding design, size and color for approval. Typical Home Clapboard Siding

155 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer to certify that vinyl siding as supplied meets or exceeds the conditions specified in section 2.02 Materials. B. Regulatory Compliance: a. National Building Code BOCA Research #93-42 b. Standard Building Code SBCCI Compliance Report #9632C c. Uniform Building Code ICBO Evaluation Report #3663 d. HUD FHA Minimum Property Standards e. Federal Housing Authority f. Dade County Acceptance # g. Texas Department of Insurance Evaluation EC DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Siding to be packed two squares per box (except XL, shakes and scallops). Each box to be clearly marked with the manufacturer's name, the siding style, color and identifying lot number. B. Prior to application, vinyl siding and accessories are to be stored in an area that is clean, dry and out of direct sunlight. C. Handle material in a manner to prevent damage. Do not allow siding cartons to crease WARRANTY A. Upon completion provide a written Transferable, Lifetime Limited Warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Material to be supplied by Alside Division of Associated Materials Incorporated, Cuyahoga Falls, Ohio (800) or otherwise approved as equal by the architect prior to the bid date MATERIALS A. Vinyl siding shall conform to all of the requirements established by ASTM Specification D3679, developed in cooperation with the industry and published by the American Society for Testing and Materials. Manufacturer shall maintain rigorous production quality control standards to assure that Premium Vinyl Siding will perform as expected for its intended use. Vinyl siding shall be VSI certified. Typical Home Clapboard Siding

156 B. Typical Compound Properties : Vinyl siding is produced from Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds meeting the requirements of ASTM D 3679 for compound class number 2 materials with the following manufacturing and product specifications. C. Test Criteria Typical Properties: Impact F 3.86 ft lbf/in of notch (ASTM D 256) Impact F 2.4 ft lbf/in of notch (ASTM D 256) Tensile Strength 5718 psi (ASTM D 638) Modulus of Elasticity in Tension 399,800 psi (ASTM D 638) Deflection Temperature Under Load F (ASTM D 648) D. Fire Resistance Properties: Average Time of Burning<5 sec (ASTM D 635) Average Extent of Burning<5 mm (ASTM D 635) Flame Spread 15 (ASTM E 84) 20 - acrylic-based colors (ASTM E84) Smoke Density>500 (ASTM E 84) Ignition Properties, Self Ignition did not occur. At 680 F sample began to smolder and continued until consumed. (ASTM D 1929) E. Typical Siding Properties: Length:12 ft. 1 in. ± 1/4 in. Width:9 in. ± 1/8 in. Thickness: in. nominal Warp:0.0. (ASTM D 3679) Heat Shrinkage: Alside sidings and soffits meet all requirements for heat shrinkage (ASTM D3697)0.93% (ASTM D 3679) 4-1/2 in. profiles Impact Resistance: 89 in-lb (ASTM D 4226, PROCA, H.25) Weatherability: No surface or structural defects such as peeling, cracking, chipping, etc. when tested as per ASTM D Coefficient of Linear Expansion: 3.05 x 10 to the power of -5 in./in. F (ASTM D696) Gloss (75 gloss meter)alside siding and soffits meet all requirements for gloss Surface Distortion: No Distortion at 120 F (ASTM D 3679) F. Siding Dimensions and Description: Description: Conquest 4-1/2" clapboard profile. Each 9 inch wide horizontal siding panel is nominally configured as two 4-1/2 inch panels in the clapboard style. Length: 12 ft. 1 in. Width: 9 in. Thickness: 0.040" Description: Conquest 3" clapboard profile. Each 9 inch wide horizontal siding panel is nominally configured as three 3 inch panels in the clapboard style. Length: 12 ft. 1 in. Width: 9 in. Thickness: 0.040" Typical Home Clapboard Siding

157 Description: Conquest 4-1/2" dutch lap profile. Each 9 inch wide horizontal siding panel is nominally configured as two 4-1/2 inch panels in the Dutch Lap style. Length: 12 ft. 1 in. Width: 9 in. Thickness: 0.040" G. General Specifications a. Embossing: Siding panel to match the sample provided under section b. Color: Siding color shall be as specified by architect. c. Interlock: Siding panels are made with post-form style lock with positive interlock. Both ends of the panel are factory cut and notched for overlap. d. Nail slots: Elongated nail slots 1" long are spaced approximately 1/4" apart in the nailing hem to allow siding to expand and contract properly. e. Weep holes: Small holes under the bottom butt prevent vapor build-up and allow accumulated moisture to escape ACCESSORIES A. Accessories shall be consistent with the shape, size and properties as shown in the drawing and as required for complete installation. Color shall be matched or color coordinated to the siding according to the architect s specifications. Accessories shall be produced from the same compound materials and with comparable properties as the siding. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Confirm that all critical dimensions are as specified in the drawings. B. Commencement of siding installation implies acceptance of the substrate as suitable to accept siding PREPARATION 3.03 INSTALATION A. Any substrate flaws or defects must be repaired before the vinyl siding is applied. Vinyl siding must be applied to walls that are in plane and free from obstructions. Furr where necessary. A. Install in accordance with the latest edition of the "How to Install Vinyl Siding and Soffit" published by Alside. Included in the application should be any special details from the drawings. Typical Home Clapboard Siding

158 B. The vinyl siding and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the best practice, with all joint members plumb and true FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After installation of siding check entire surface for obvious flaws or defects. Replace and repair any problem areas, paying close attention to the substrate for causes of the problem CLEAN UP A. After the vinyl siding has been applied, clean as necessary to remove all fingerprints and soiled areas. Upon completion of the siding application, the entire area is to be cleaned, removing all scrap, packaging and unused building materials. Code Compliance ICBO 3663 SBCCI BOCA FHA-meets requirements Listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (file R14214) Alside, Inc. PO Box 2010 Akron, Ohio For information and samples, call Alside FastBack teleresponse service: END OF SECTION Typical Home Clapboard Siding

159 SECTION VINYL SIDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY ***** Vinyl siding can be installed over wood or metal stud framing and other wall assemblies. For renovation projects, vinyl siding can be installed over wood siding, masonry, and other types of existing wall finishes. Edit this article to reflect project applications. ***** A. Section includes: Preformed vinyl siding, trim, and accessories for facing [existing] [wood framed] [metal stud] [masonry] [wood siding] exterior walls. B. Related sections: ***** List other specification sections dealing with work directly related to this section such as the following. ***** 1. Section Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Metal framing for support of vinyl siding. 2. Section Rough Carpentry: Wood stud framing, furring, and sheathing for support of vinyl siding. 3. Section Vinyl Soffit Panels. 4. Section Joint Sealers: Sealants used in conjunction with vinyl siding installation. 1.2 REFERENCES ***** List standards referenced elsewhere in this section. ***** A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM D226 - Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 2. ASTM D256 - Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics. 3. ASTM D635 - Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supported Plastics in a Horizontal Position. 4. ASTM D638 - Tensile Properties of Plastics. 5. ASTM D648 - Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position. Shake Siding Typical Home

160 6. ASTM D696 - Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics. 7. ASTM D790 - Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 8. ASTM D Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics. 9. ASTM D Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Siding. 10. ASTM D Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Related PVC and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Building Products Compounds. 11. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): UL 94 - Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials. C. Vinyl Siding Institute (VSI): Vinyl Siding Installation, a How-To Guide. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ***** Edit the following to list definitions of terms used elsewhere in specification section. ***** A. Beaded: Horizontal siding panel with half-round decorative bead at bottom edge. B. Board and batten: Vertical siding with joints covered by narrow strips. C. Clapboard: Horizontal siding panel with bottom edge thicker than top and installed with thicker edge overlapping thinner edge. D. Dutch colonial clapboard: Clapboard siding panel with flat, vertical face and upper portion tapered to form thin edge. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Siding shall be fabricated and installed to withstand positive and negative wind pressure loads acting normal to wall in accordance with applicable codes. B. Siding system to accommodate without damage to components or failure of weather barrier movement caused by seasonal temperature cycling and deflection of structural support framing. C. Moisture entering or condensation occurring within siding system shall drain to exterior. ***** Revere Vinyl Sidings have been fire rated by Underwriter Laboratories (UL) for one hour rated walls as UL designations U026 and U032 and for two hours rated walls as UL designation U301. Note that fire ratings are for complete wall assemblies which Shake Siding Typical Home

161 may require one or more layers of gypsum sheathing as substrate for vinyl siding. Include and edit the following paragraph if vinyl siding is used in fire rated wall assembly. ***** D. Fire resistance for wall assembly faced with vinyl siding: [1] [2] hour as listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) for [U026] [U032] [U301] [ ] designation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Provide in accordance with Section Submittal Procedures: 1. Product data including material descriptions, dimensions, and profiles. 2. Shop drawings showing layout, dimensions, weatherproofing, penetrations, terminations, trim, and installation methods. 3. Color samples for selection by Architect. 4. [4 inches] [102 mm] long minimum samples of siding and trim in selected color. 5. Certificates documenting siding complies with requirements specified in Paragraphs [1.4], [1.6.C], and [2.2]. 6. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 7. Copy of warranty required by Paragraph [1.8] for review by Architect. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company with a minimum of 10 years successful experience manufacturing vinyl siding. B. Single source responsibility: To ensure functional and appearance compatibility, siding and all trim pieces shall be products of single manufacturer. ***** Revere Brand Vinyl Siding products meet or exceed requirements of major United States and Canadian building codes. Edit the following paragraph to reflect applicable requirements for project location. ***** C. Vinyl siding shall be fabricated and installed to comply with: 1. International Code Council-ESR Canadian Construction Materials Centre (CCMC): Report No L. 3. Federal Housing Administration (FHA), Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD): Minimum Property Standards. 4. New York City Department of Building Material Equipment and Shake Siding Typical Home

162 Acceptance: MEA M. 1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver siding in manufacturer's protective cartons and clearly labeled as to specific products contained. B. During delivery and storage keep siding cartons flat and supported along entire length. C. Store siding on level surface in clean, dry, well ventilated area. Protect from falling objects and construction activities. D. Do not store in locations where temperatures may exceed [130 degrees F] [54 degrees C]. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide under provisions of Section Closeout Submittals: Lifetime limited, non-prorated, transferable warranty with 50 year hail protection, and fade coverage. In the case of siding purchased by, or installed upon property owned by or in part by corporations, government entities or agencies, religious organizations, trusts, condominium or corporate housing arrangements, intangible legal entities or any other entity or organization capable of an infinite life, the warranty period will be fifty (50) years following the installation of the siding (prorated as indicated in the Warranty Transfer Schedule). PARTS 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Products provided by Revere Building Products and manufactured by Gentek Building Products, Inc., P.O. Box 110, Akron, Ohio 44309; ; are acceptable and are listed in this Section to establish requirements for product type and quality. B. Requests to use equivalent products of other manufacturers shall be submitted in accordance with Section Product Substitution Procedures. Architect reserves right to reject proposed substitution on basis of color and profile even though fabrication, materials, and performance are equivalent. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fabricate siding and trim from 100 percent polyvinyl chloride (PVC) suitable for being recycled, with integral color for full thickness, and complying with ASTM D3679 and ASTM D4216. B. Minimum PVC properties: 1. Tensile strength tested in accordance with ASTM D638: 6,700 PSI. Shake Siding Typical Home

163 2. Flexural strength tested in accordance with ASTM D790: 14,000 PSI. 3. Modulus of elasticity tested in accordance with ASTM D638: 410,000 PSI. 4. Impact resistance tested in accordance with ASTM D256: a. At 32 degrees F: 2.0 foot pounds per inch of notch. b. At 70 degrees F: 3.6 foot pounds per inch of notch. 5. Coefficient of linear thermal expansion tested in accordance with ASTM D696: [2.9 x 10-5 inch/inch/degree F.] [5.3 x 10-5 mm/mm/degree C.] 6. Deflection temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM D648 with 264 PSI load: [163 degrees F.] [73 degrees C.] 7. Average maximum burn distance tested in accordance with ASTM D635: [0.8 inch.] [20 mm.] 8. Average maximum burn time tested in accordance with ASTM D635: 5 seconds. 9. Maximum ignition temperature tested in accordance with ASTM D1929: a. Flash ignition: [752 degrees F.] [400 degrees C.] b. Self ignition: [860 degrees F.] [460 degrees C.] 10. Flame spread tested in accordance with ASTM E84: 15 maximum. 11. Smoke development tested in accordance with ASTM E84: 500 maximum. 2.3 SIDING PANELS ***** SOVEREIGN SELECT SERIES: Revere Sovereign Select Vinyl Siding has an embossed cedar grain finish. There are four types. ***** ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Sovereign Select No with simulated lap joint forming two 4 inches (102 mm) wide panels. ***** A. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Sovereign Select No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [8 inches] [203 mm] exposed width by [150 inches] [3810 mm] long with [3/4 inch] [19 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.046 inch.] [1.17 mm.] Shake Siding Typical Home

164 3. Profile: Clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed cedar grain texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium, designer. ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Sovereign Select No with simulated lap joint forming two 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) wide panels. ***** B. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Sovereign Select No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [9 inches] [229 mm] exposed width by [145 inches] [3683 mm] long with [3/4 inch] [19 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.046 inch.] [1.17 mm.] 3. Profile: Dutch colonial clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed cedar grain texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium, designer. ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Sovereign Select No with simulated lap joint forming two 5 inches (125 mm) wide panels. ***** C. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Sovereign Select No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [10 inches] [254 mm] exposed width by [144 inches] [3658 mm] long with [3/4 inch] [19 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.046 inch.] [1.17 mm.] 3. Profile: Clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed cedar grain texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium, designer. ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Sovereign Select No with simulated lap joint forming two 5 inches (127 mm) wide panels. ***** D. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Sovereign Select No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [10 inches] [254 mm] exposed width by [144 inches] [3658 mm] long with [3/4 inch] [19 mm] butt. Shake Siding Typical Home

165 2. Thickness: [0.046 inch.] [1.17 mm.] 3. Profile: Dutch colonial clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed cedar grain texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium, designer. ****************************************************************************** ***** SOVEREIGN 16 SERIES: Revere Sovereign 16 Vinyl Siding is provided in 16 feet (4877 mm) nominal lengths with an embossed cedar grain finish. There are two types. ***** ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Sovereign 16 No with simulated lap joint forming two 4 inches (102 mm) wide panels. ***** E. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Sovereign 16 No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [8 inches] [203 mm] exposed width by [193 inches] [4903 mm] long with [3/4 inch] [19 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.046 inch.] [1.17 mm.] 3. Profile: Clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed cedar grain texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium. ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Sovereign 16 No with simulated lap joint forming two 5 inches (127 mm) wide panels. ***** F. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Sovereign 16 No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [10 inches] [254 mm] exposed width by [196 inches] [4979 mm] long with [3/4 inch] [19 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.046 inch.] [1.17 mm.] 3. Profile: Dutch colonial clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed cedar grain texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium. Shake Siding Typical Home

166 ****************************************************************************** ***** SOVEREIGN BOARD & BATTEN: Revere Sovereign Board & Batten Vinyl Siding has an embossed light roughsawn finish. Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Sovereign Board & Batten No vertical siding with board and batten profile. ***** G. Type: Vertical, single panel siding with slotted attachment holes along one side; Revere Sovereign Board & Batten No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [7 inches] [178 mm] exposed width by [120 inches] [3048 mm] long with [2 inches] [51 mm] wide batten. 2. Thickness: [0.050 inch.] [1.27 mm.] 3. Profile: One edge formed to simulate batten and overlap and engage edge of adjoining panel. 4. Surface finish: Embossed light roughsawn texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium. ****************************************************************************** ***** BENNINGTON SERIES: Revere Bennington Vinyl Siding has an embossed light roughsawn finish. There are four types. If Revere Bennington is being specified select type from the following. ***** ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Bennington No with simulated lap joint forming two 4 inches (102 mm) wide panels. ***** H. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Bennington No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [8 inches] [203 mm] exposed width by [150 inches] [3810 mm] long with [5/8 inch] [16 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.044 inch.] [1.12 mm.] 3. Profile: Clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed light roughsawn texture. 5. Color: Variegated. ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Bennington No with simulated lap joint forming two 5 inches (127 mm) wide panels. ***** I. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along Shake Siding Typical Home

167 top edge; Revere Bennington No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [10 inches] [254 mm] exposed width by [144 inches] [3658 mm] long with [5/8 inch] [16 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.044 inch.] [1.12 mm.] 3. Profile: Clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed light roughsawn texture. 5. Color: Variegated. ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Bennington No with simulated lap joint forming two 5 inches (127 mm) wide panels. ***** J. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Bennington No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [10 inches] [254 mm] exposed width by [144 inches] [3658 mm] long with [1/2 inch] [13 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.044 inch.] [1.12 mm.] 3. Profile: Dutch colonial clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed light roughsawn texture. 5. Color: Variegated. ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Bennington No vertical siding with grooves forming three 4 inches (102 mm) wide panels. ***** K. Type: Vertical, triple panel siding with slotted attachment holes along one edge; Revere Bennington No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [12 inches] [305 mm] exposed width by [144 inches] [3658 mm] long. 2. Thickness: [0.044 inch.] [1.12 mm.] 3. Profile: Grooves forming three [4 inches] [102 mm] wide panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed light roughsawn texture. 5. Color: Variegated. ****************************************************************************** Shake Siding Typical Home

168 ***** FAIR OAKS SERIES: Revere Fair Oaks Vinyl Siding has an embossed hardwood finish. There are five types. If Revere Fair Oaks is being specified select type from the following. ***** ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Fair Oaks No with simulated lap joint forming two 4 inches (102 mm) wide panels. ***** L. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Fair Oaks No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [8 inches] [203 mm] exposed width by [150 inches] [3810 mm] long with [1/2 inch] [13 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.044 inch.] [1.12 mm.] 3. Profile: Clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed hardwood texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium. ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Fair Oaks No with simulated lap joint forming two 4 inches (102 mm) wide panels. ***** M. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Fair Oaks No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [8 inches] [203 mm] exposed width by [150 inches] [3810 mm] long with [1/2 inch] [13 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.044 inch.] [1.12 mm.] 3. Profile: Dutch colonial clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed hardwood texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium. ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Fair Oaks No with simulated lap joint forming two 5 inches (127 mm) wide panels. ***** N. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Fair Oaks No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [10 inches] [254 mm] exposed width by [144 inches] [3658 mm] long with [5/8 inch] [16 mm] butt. Shake Siding Typical Home

169 2. Thickness: [0.044 inch.] [1.12 mm.] 3. Profile: Clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed hardwood texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium. ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Fair Oaks No with simulated lap joint forming two 5 inches (127 mm) wide panels. ***** O. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Fair Oaks No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [10 inches] [254 mm] exposed width by [144 inches] [3658 mm] long with [1/2 inch] [13 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.044 inch.] [1.12 mm.] 3. Profile: Dutch colonial clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed hardwood texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium. ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Fair Oaks No single panel siding 8 inches (203 mm) wide. ***** P. Type: Horizontal, single panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Fair Oaks No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [8 inches] [203 mm] exposed width by [150 inches] [3810 mm] long with [5/8 inch] [16 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.044 inch.] [1.12 mm.] 3. Profile: Single clapboard panel. 4. Surface finish: Embossed hardwood texture. 5. Color: Basic. ****************************************************************************** ***** AMHERST SERIES: Revere Amherst Vinyl Siding has an embossed light roughsawn finish. There are four types. If Revere Amherst is being specified select type from the following. ***** ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Amherst No with simulated lap joint forming two 4 inches (102 mm) wide panels. ***** Shake Siding Typical Home

170 Q. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Amherst No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [8 inches] [203 mm] exposed width by [150 inches] [3810 mm] long with [1/2 inch] [13 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.042 inch.] [1.07 mm.] 3. Profile: Clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed light roughsawn texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium. ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Amherst No with simulated lap joint forming two 4 inches (102 mm) wide panels. ***** R. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Amherst No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [8 inches] [203 mm] exposed width by [150 inches] [3810 mm] long with [1/2 inch] [13 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.042 inch.] [1.07 mm.] 3. Profile: Dutch colonial clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed light roughsawn texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium. ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Amherst No with simulated lap joint forming two 5 inches (127 mm) wide panels. ***** S. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Amherst No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [10 inches] [254 mm] exposed width by [144 inches] [3658 mm] long with [5/8 inch] [16 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.042 inch.] [1.07 mm.] 3. Profile: Clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed light roughsawn texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium. Shake Siding Typical Home

171 ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Amherst No with simulated lap joint forming two 5 inches (127 mm) wide panels. ***** T. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Amherst No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [10 inches] [254 mm] exposed width by [144 inches] [3658 mm] long with [1/2 inch] [13 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.042 inch.] [1.07 mm.] 3. Profile: Dutch colonial clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed light roughsawn texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium. ****************************************************************************** ***** DRIFTWOOD SERIES: Revere Driftwood Vinyl Siding has an embossed driftwood finish. There are two types. If Revere Driftwood is being specified select type from the following. ***** ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Driftwood No with simulated lap joint forming two 4 inches (102 mm) wide panels. ***** U. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Driftwood No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [8 inches] [203 mm] exposed width by [150 inches] [3810 mm] long with [7/16 inch] [11 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.040 inch.] [1.02 mm.] 3. Profile: Clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed driftwood texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium. ***** Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Driftwood No with simulated lap joint forming two 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) wide panels. ***** V. Type: Horizontal, double panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Driftwood No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [9 inches] [229 mm] exposed width by [145 inches] [3683 Shake Siding Typical Home

172 mm] long with [7/16 inch] [11 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.040 inch.] [1.02 mm.] 3. Profile: Dutch colonial clapboard with simulated lap joint forming two panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed driftwood texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium. ****************************************************************************** ***** SOMERVILLE III: Revere Somerville III No has an embossed brushed finish and two simulated lap joints forming three 3 inches (76 mm) wide panels. Include the following paragraph to specify Revere Somerville III. ***** W. Type: Horizontal, triple panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Revere Somerville III No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [9 inches] [229 mm] exposed width by [145 inches] [3683 mm] long with [1/2 inch] [13 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.042 inch.] [1.07 mm.] 3. Profile: Clapboard with simulated lap joints forming three panels. 4. Surface finish: Embossed brushed texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium. ****************************************************************************** ***** BERKSHIRE BEADED: Revere Berkshire Beaded Vinyl Siding has an embossed brushed finish. Include the following paragraph to specify Berkshire Beaded No single panel with beaded edge. ***** X. Type: Horizontal, single panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Berkshire Beaded No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [6.5 inches] [165 mm] exposed width by [147-3/4 inches] [3753 mm] long with [9/16 inch] [14 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.046 inch.] [1.17 mm.] 3. Profile: Horizontal siding panel with half-round decorative bead at bottom edge. 4. Surface finish: Embossed brushed texture. Shake Siding Typical Home

173 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium. ****************************************************************************** ***** CENTENNIAL BEADED: Centennial Beaded Vinyl Siding has an embossed brushed finish. Include the following paragraph to specify Centennial Beaded No single panel with beaded edge. ***** Y. Type: Horizontal, single panel siding with slotted attachment holes along top edge; Centennial Beaded No as provided by Revere Building Products. 1. Dimensions: [6.5 inches] [165 mm] exposed width by [147-3/4 inches] [3753 mm] long with [9/16 inch] [14 mm] butt. 2. Thickness: [0.046 inch.] [1.17 mm.] 3. Profile: Horizontal siding panel with half-round decorative bead at bottom edge. 4. Surface finish: Embossed brushed texture. 5. Color: Basic, standard, premium. ****************************************************************************** ***** Revere Vinyl Siding is available in the following colors and price ranges. However, not all colors are available for all siding types. Refer to Revere product literature for list of colors provided for each siding type. ***** Basic color: No Snow White Standard colors: No Almond No Antique Ivory No Dover Gray No Everglade No Linen No Maize No Mist Blue No Pearl No Sandstone No Sandalwood Premium colors: No Canyon Clay No Pebble No Sage Shake Siding Typical Home

174 No Wicker Designer colors: No Arcadian No Brownstone No Classic Brown No Colonial No Flannel No Venetian Red Variegated colors: 2.4 TRIM No Aspen No Birch No Cedar No Chestnut No Maple No Willow Z. Color: [No. [ ] - [ ] as provided by Revere Building Products.] [As selected by Architect from available colors in manufacturer's [basic] [standard] [premium] [designer] [variegated] range.] A. Provide trim pieces as detailed on Drawings and approved shop drawings and as required for complete, weathertight, functional installation. B. Vinyl trim: Fabricate from same material as siding to shape, dimensions, and profile required to accommodate siding type and project conditions. Provide with channels to receive siding panels, flanges for concealed weathertight attachment, and slotted attachment holes. Color shall match or coordinate with siding color. In order to eliminated or minimize joints, form in longest possible lengths with [10 feet] [3048 mm] as minimum. ***** Edit the following list to reflect types of trim pieces required. Refer to Revere product literature for types, product numbers, and dimensional options. Note that not all trim pieces are suitable for all siding types. ***** 1. Outside corner post: One piece with [[3] [3-1/2] [6] inches] [[76] [89] [152] mm] wide, [flat] [ribbed] exposed faces; No. [ ] as provided by Revere Building Products. 2. Bay and bow outside corner post: One piece with [2 inches] [50.8 mm] wide, exposed face; No. [ ] as provided by Revere Building Products. 3. Fluted corner post with foam insert: One piece with molded foam backing [7 inches] [177.8 mm] wide, fluted exposed face; No. [ ] as provided by Revere Building Products. Shake Siding Typical Home

175 4. Beaded corner post with foam insert: One piece with molded foam backing [5 inches] [127 mm] wide, exposed face with beaded accent; No. [ ] as provided by Revere Building Products. 5. Beaded corner starter: One piece with beaded exposed face used with 3-1/2 inch or 5 inch window and door surrounds to make three-piece corner; No. [ ] as provided by Revere Building Products. 6. Inside corner posts: One piece with convex exposed face; No. [ ] as provided by Revere Building Products. 7. J-channel: [ ] [inch] [mm] wide channel with [ ] [inch] [mm] exposed face; No. [ ] as provided by Revere Building Products. 8. Starter strip: [3 inches] [76.2 mm] wide with continuous bottom groove to engage overlapping siding panel; No. [ ] as provided by Revere Building Products. 9. Drip cap: [2-5/8 inches] [67 mm] wide Z-shaped piece; No. [ ] as provided by Revere Building Products. 10.Undersill trim: [[1-1/2] [1-3/4] inches] [[38] [44.5] mm] wide piece installed at window sills to receive siding panel cut to fit around window; No. [ ] as provided by Revere Building Products. 11.Double undersill trim: [1-1/2 inches] [38 mm] wide piece installed at window sills to receive siding panel cut to fit around window; No. [ ] as provided by Revere Building Products. 12.Window and door surrounds: Trim section with [[3-1/2] [5] inches] [[89] [127] mm] wide exposed face designed to receive siding panels and provide finish perimeter around openings; No. [ ] as provided by Revere Building Products. 13.Fluted lineal: Trim section with [5] inches] [127] mm] wide exposed fluted face designed to receive siding panels and provide decorative finish perimeter around openings; No. [ ] as provided by Revere Building Products. 14.Beltline trim: Horizontal accent line trim with [1-1/2 inches] [38 mm] exposed face to provide decorative feature or separation between two types of siding; No. [ ] as provided by Revere Building Products. 15.Bellyband: Horizontal accent line trim with [6 inches] [152.4 mm] exposed face to provide decorative feature, separation between two types of siding, or as a starter course for siding; No. [ ] as provided by Revere Building Products. 16.H-trim: Horizontal accent line trim with [3-1/2 inches] [88.9 mm] exposed face to provide decorative feature or transition between two types of siding; No. [ ] as provided by Revere Building Products. Shake Siding Typical Home

176 ***** Universal aluminum starter trim is provided as an option to vinyl starter trim pieces. Include the following paragraph to specify aluminum starter trim. Refer to Revere product literature for color options. ***** C. Aluminum starter trim: [2-1/2 inches] [64 mm] wide strip fabricated from aluminum sheet with flanges for concealed weathertight attachment, slotted attachment holes, and continuous bottom groove to engage overlapping siding panel; No as provided by Revere Building Products. ***** Universal steel starter trim is provided as an option to vinyl starter trim pieces. Include the following paragraph to specify steel starter trim. Refer to Revere product literature for product numbers and color options. ***** D. Steel starter trim: [[2-1/2] [3-1/2] inches] [[64] [89] mm] wide strip fabricated from sheet with flanges for concealed weathertight attachment, slotted attachment holes, and continuous bottom groove to engage overlapping siding panel; No. [ ] as provided by Revere Building Products. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Underlayment: No. 30 un-perforated asphalt saturated felt complying with ASTM D226. B. Fasteners: Weather and corrosion resistant nails, staples, or screws of type, size, and spacing as recommended by siding manufacturer for Project conditions. 1. Nails: [5/16 inch] [8 mm] minimum diameter head and [1/8 inch] [3 mm] minimum diameter shank. Minimum lengths of: a. General use: [1-1/2 inches.] [38 mm.] b. Residing: [2 inches.] [51 mm.] c. Siding with sheathing substrate: [2-1/2 inches.] [64 mm.] d. Trim: [1 inch.] [25 mm.] 2. Screws: No. 8 truss or pan head, self-tapping sheet metal type. 3. Staples: 16 gauge, semi-flattened with elliptical cross-section, [1 inch] [25 mm] minimum length, and crown wide enough to allow free movement. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Prepare substrate and install siding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, approved shop drawings, and VSI Installation Guide. Shake Siding Typical Home

177 ***** Include the following paragraph if vinyl soffit panels are used in conjunction with vinyl siding. ***** B. Coordinate work with provision and installation of soffit specified in Section Vinyl Soffit Panels to ensure compatibility and weathertight, neat transition from vertical siding to horizontal soffit panels. 3.2 PREPARATION ***** Edit and include the following paragraph if siding is installed over existing siding or other exterior wall finish. ***** A. Inspect and prepare existing substrate to receive vinyl siding. 1. Securely fasten loose siding boards. Replace rotting, split, and deteriorated substrate members. 2. Remove loose and deteriorated sealant around windows, doors, and other penetrations. Reseal to ensure weathertightness. 3. Remove gutters, downspouts, light fixtures, and other surface mounted items and protrusions. 4. Verify evenness of walls. Install [preservative treated wood furring strips] [galvanized steel furring channels] as detailed on Drawings and approved shop drawings and as required to provide flat, even, rigid substrate for vinyl siding. Place furring perpendicular to direction of siding. ***** Include the following paragraph if siding is installed as new construction. ***** B. Inspection: Verify that wall framing and sheathing is securely anchored, properly spaced, even, plumb, flat, and dry. C. Underlayment: Install one layer underlayment horizontally. Weather lap edges [6 inches] [152 mm] minimum. Securely staple in place. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Field cutting: Accurately measure and cut siding and trim. 1. Power circular saw: Use fine-toothed blade installed to rotate backward. Do not attempt to cut other materials with reverse direction saw blade. 2. Utility knife: Score with vinyl component face up and snap to separate. 3. Sheet metal snips: Avoid closing blades completely at end of stroke. B. Trim: Prior to installing siding, locate and anchor starter strips, J channels, corner posts, and other trim. Ensure that components are level and plumb. Where trim pieces join, leave [1/4 inch] [6 mm] expansion gap. Shake Siding Typical Home

178 C. Siding panels: Install [horizontally] [vertically] with panels aligned, level, and plumb. 1. Engage first panel in starter strip and ensure it is securely locked before fastening. Overlap, engage, and lock subsequent panels over preceding ones. 2. Expansion joints: Leave [1/4 inch] [6 mm] gap where siding engages corner post or J-channel. 3. Lap joints: Overlap siding panel ends approximately [1 inch] [25 mm]. Stagger end laps. Face overlap joints away from entrances. 4. Penetrating protrusions: Provide end lap joints at penetrations. Start new siding panel to limit number of lap joints. Notch end of panels to accommodate protrusions. Allow [1/4 inch] [6 mm] perimeter gap. D. Fastening: Install siding panels and trim to move freely from side to side. 1. Place fasteners in center of attachment slots. 2. Drive fasteners straight and level. 3. Do not drive head of fastener tightly against siding hem. Allow [1/32 inch] [1 mm] clearance between fastener head and siding panel. 4. Do not place fastener through facing of siding panel. E. Sealants: Apply sealants only where indicated on approved shop drawings. Do not apply sealant to end lap joints or where panels meet corner trim, J channels, or surrounds. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean vinyl siding and trim. Use detergent as required. Do not use solvents, abrasives, wire brushes, or steel scrapers. B. Remove excess materials and debris from site. [Legally dispose of off site.] [Scrap vinyl shall be collected for recycling.] C. Protect siding from subsequent construction operations. If damage occurs, remove and replace damaged components to provide siding in original, undamaged condition. END OF SECTION Shake Siding Typical Home

179 SECTION WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Style and Rail type wood doors 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Carpentry. B. Section Architectural Paneling. C. Section Finishing Hardware. D. Section Glass and glazing for doors. E. Section Painting: Site Finishing Doors. F. Section Standard Steel Frames: Steel Door Frames REFERENCES A. WDMA-Quality Standards Window and Door Manufactures Association Stile and rail Door B. NFPA No 80 Fire Doors and Windows C. ASTM E152 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies D. NFPA 252 Methods of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies E. Warnock Hersey International Certification Listings for Fire Doors. F. ANSI/HPMA HP Hardwood and Decorative Plywood G. IBC 7-13 Fire resistive assemblies for protection of openings. H. IBC 715 Opening protectives ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) recommended by manufacturer for best results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1. Temperature should be 60 to 80 degrees F (15 to 27 degrees C) at least 24 hours before installation and maintained after. Typical Home Wood Door

180 2. Relative humidity should be 30 to 50 percent at least 24 hours before installation and maintained after DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Doors will not be delivered until weatherproof storage space is available in the building. Doors will be stored in a space with controlled temperature and humidity ranging between 30 and 60 percent. Doors will be stacked flat and off the floor, to prevent warpage. Protect doors from damage and direct exposure to sunlight. B. Factory finished doors will be individually wrapped in polybags to protect the finish from damage by contact with other doors. C. Do not walk/place other material on top of stacked doors. Do not drag doors across one another. D. Contractor will protect doors from damage before, during, and after installation. All damaged doors will be repaired/replaced by the contractor at no cost to the owner. E. Door edges shall be protected with heavy corner guards 1.06 WARRANTY A. Present written warranty from the manufacturer in agreement to the following: Warranty includes replacing, including cost of re-hanging and refinishing, at no cost to owner, wood doors exhibiting defects in materials or workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Woodtech Trading Co. Custom Stile and Rail Doors. B. Marshfield Door Systems. C. Artistic Doors and Windows DOOR TYPES A. Style and Rail type wood doors 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate premium type doors in accordance with requirements of WDMA Quality Standards unless specifically indicated otherwise. B. Fabricate all wood doors in strict accordance with the referenced standards specified. Typical Home Wood Door

181 C. Finish on job. See Painting Section PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND HANDLING A. Deliver: Protect doors at all times. Deliver doors to site after plaster and cement are dry and building has reached average prevailing relative humidity of locality. B. Handling: Do not drag doors across one another INSTALLATION A. Examine all door frames prior to hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size and location. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Do not proceed with installation until satisfactory conditions have been corrected INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install door frames with proper type and length screws according to manufacturers written installation instructions. C. Install doors into frames according to manufacturers written instructions, then shim as necessary to adjust spacing for proper fit and operation of entire unit. D. Securely anchor hardware in correct position and alignment. E. Adjust hardware and door for proper function and smooth operation, proper latching, without force or excessive clearance ADJUST AND PROTECTION A. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. B. Protection and Completed Work: Advise Contractor of proper procedures required for protection of installed wood doors from damage or deterioration until acceptance of work. END OF SECTION Typical Home Wood Door

182 SECTION SLDIING GLASS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. In-Swing Patio Doors B. Out-Swing Patio Doors C. Sliding Patio Doors 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturer Association (AAMA) 1. ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 /NAFS; Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors (Specifier Note: In applications where hurricane resistance is not required DELETE AAMA 506 reference.) 2. AAMA 506; Voluntary Specifications for Hurricane and Impact and Cycle Testing of Fenestration Products B. ASTM International (Specifier Note: In applications where hurricane resistance is not required DELETE ASTM E 1886 and E 1996 references.) 1. ASTM E 1886; Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials 2. ASTM E 1996; Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes C. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) 1. NFRC 100; Procedure for Determining Fenestration Thermal Properties 2. NFRC 200; Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance (Specifier Note: DELETE Florida TAS information if project is not within the High Velocity Hurricane Zone) Typical Home Sliding Glass Door

183 D. South Florida Building Code Impact Test Procedures (Miami-Dade TAS) 1. TAS 201; Impact Test Procedures 2. TAS 202; Criteria for testing Impact and Non-Impact Resistant Building Envelope Components using Uniform Static Air Pressure 3. TAS 203; Criteria for testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading E. Window & Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA) 1. WDMA I.S.4; Water Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure treatment for Millwork 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Provide patio doors capable of complying with requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer s patio doors that are representative of those specified and that are of test size required by ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101 I.S.2/NAFS. (Specifier Note: Include patio door design pressure (DP) ratings as part of the performance requirements. Required DP will vary dependent on project site, the location in the building and patio door size. Coordinate DP with the Structural Engineer. DP ratings and related patio door size and style are available at or by contacting a JELD-WEN representative.) B. Structural Requirements Provide patio doors capable of complying with requirements indicated: 1. Design pressure: [Insert value] [As indicated on drawings.] (Specifier Note: DELETE requirement if products will not be used in a High Velocity Hurricane Zone or will be used in conjunction with another type of Approved Hurricane Protection Device.) AND/OR C. Impact (Windborne-Debris) Resistance 1. Patio doors capable of resisting impact from windborne debris, when tested in accordance with ASTM E1886, ASTM E1996, and AAMA 506. (Specifier Note: Notice of Authorization (NOA) from Maimi-Dade Code Officials is type and size specific. Information is available at or by contacting a JELD-WEN representative.) Sliding Glass Door Typical Home

184 2. Provide patio doors that have been tested in accordance with TAS 201, TAS 202, and TAS 203 and have received NOA from Miami-Dade Code Officials. (Specifier Note: Include NFRC ratings as part of the performance requirements. NFRC ratings qualifying for the Energy Star program are based on the performance of the whole door assembly. Qualifying patio doors vary to fit the needs of different regions throughout the country. NFRC ratings and related JELD-WEN patio door size and styles are available at or by contacting a JELD-WEN representative.) D. NFRC Requirements Provide patio doors capable of complying with the following total patio door ratings: 1. U-Factor: [Insert value] in accordance with NFRC Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): [Insert value] in accordance with NFRC Visible Transmittance (VT): [Insert value] in accordance with NFRC SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section [ Submittal Procedures] [Insert section number and title]. B. Product Data: Submit patio door manufacturer current product literature, including installation instruction. C. Samples: Provide finish samples for all products. D. Quality Assurance Submittals (Specifier Note: DELETE Design Data, Test Reports submittal requirements when propriety specification is used and can be held. MAINTAIN Design Data, Test Reports submittal requirement when other products may be submitted as substitution.) 1. Design Data, Test Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance with indicated requirements. 2. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer s written installation instructions. E. Closeout Submittals 1. Refer to Section [ Closeout Submittals] [Insert section number and title]. Typical Home Sliding Glass Door

185 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. WDMA Hallmark certification label indicating patio doors meet the design requirements. B. Mock-ups 1. Patio door mock-up shall incorporate surrounding construction, including wall assembly fasteners, flashing, and other related accessories installed in accordance with patio door manufacturer s approved installation methods. a. Mock-up size: [Insert size] [As indicated on drawings.] b. Mock-up may [not] remain as part of the work. C. Pre-installation Meeting 1. Refer to Section [ Project Meetings] [Insert section number and title]. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section [ Product Requirements] [Insert section number and title]. B. Deliver patio door materials and components in manufacturer s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Store patio doors as recommended by manufacturer. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section [ Warranties] [Insert section number and title]. (Specifier Note: DELETE warranty information not specific to project.) (Specifier Note: Manufacturer standard warranty does not include installation Manufacturer standard warranty indicating that the patio door will be free from material and workmanship defects from the date of substantial completion for the time periods indicated below: 1. Patio Door Unit: 20 years (Specifier Note: SELECT warranty associated with the glazing types specified. Specialty glazing includes patterned and textured glass. Insulated glass that incorporates a specialty glass may be eligible for an extended warranty, but requires input from the manufacturer. Contact a JELD-WEN representative to discuss design options and their effect on the warranty. ) Sliding Glass Door Typical Home

186 2. Glazing: a. Insulated Glass: 20 years against seal breakage b. [Laminated Glass] [Hurricane Glass] [Specialty Glazing]: 5 years against delamination PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Specifier Note: Product Information is proprietary to JELD-WEN. If additional products are required for competitive procurement, contact JELD-WEN for assistance in listing competitive products that may be available.) 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. JELD-WEN Windows and Doors; 3250 Lakeport Blvd. P.O. Box 1329; Klamath Falls, OR , USA; Phone , fax ; Toll free ; website B. Basis of Design: Patio Doors are based on the JELD-WEN s Custom Wood Patio Doors. 2.2 MATERIALS (Specifier Note: AuraLast is a trademark preservative treatment by JELD-WEN and is distinguished from traditional preservation methods by its minimum treatment penetration of 92%.) A. Exterior Wood: Western Pine, preservative treated with AuraLast in accordance with WDMA I.S.4. B. Interior Wood: Western Pine 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Frame 1. Select kiln-dried pine AuraLast treated wood 2. Jamb Width: 4-9/16 inch (116 mm) (Specifier Note: Radius frames are for in-swing & out-swing only. DELETE Radius frames when only sliding patio doors are specified.) 3. Radius Frames: [90 inch] [31-5/16 inch] [37-5/16 inch] B. Panels Typical Home Sliding Glass Door

187 (Specifier Note: Number of panels per patio door unit varies by door size. INCLUDE number of panels under Size in Part 3 Schedule Article.) 1. Select kiln-dried pine AuraLast treated wood and Timberstrand engineered wood substrate. 2. Thickness: 1-23/32 inch (43.7mm) 3. Layout (Specifier Note: DELETE Layout for patio door styles not project specific.) a. In-Swing Patio Door: 4-5/8 inch top rail and stiles, 6-5/8 inch bottom rail b. Out-Swing Patio Door: 4-5/8 inch top rail and stiles, 6-5/8 inch bottom rail c. Sliding Patio Door: OR 1) Narrow Stile (standard): 1-23/32 inch stiles and rails, 6-5/8 inch bottom rail 2) Wide Stile (option): 4-5/8 inch top rail and stiles, [6-5/8 inch bottom rail] OR [10-1/4 inch bottom rail] C. Exterior Trim (Specifier Note: SELECT casing for construction conditions or aesthetics requirements. Utilize the following trims for indicated applications; Brickmould in conjunction with masonry veneers, Flat Casings for narrow, and Adams Casing for medium aesthetic conditions.) 1. Casing: [standard: Brickmould] [options: [[3-1/2 inch (88.9 mm)] [4-1/2 inch (114.3 mm)] [5-1/2 inch (139.7 mm)] Flat Casing] [Adams Casing]] (Specifier Note: DELETE Mull Cap when patio door layout does not require units to be joined (mulled) together at the factory.) 2. Mull Cap: [standard: ½ inch wide] [options: [1 inch] [2 inch] [3-1/2 inch] [6 inch] wide] D. Extension Jambs: Factory applied on all four sides of frame interior, in wall depths up to 6-9/16 inch (304.8mm). E. Weatherstripping (Specifier Note: DELETE weatherstripping for patio door styles not project specific.) 1. In-Swing Patio Door: Continuous dual foam filled bulb seal compressed between exterior of panel and all four sides of frame. Sliding Glass Door Typical Home

188 F. Sill 2. Out-Swing Patio Door: Continuous dual foam filled bulb seal compressed between exterior of panel and all four sides of frame. 3. Sliding: Foam filled vinyl wrapped strips at head and side jambs, Polypropylene pile-sealing strip at bottom of operating panel, Vinyl interlocks and compressible foam filled bulbs at meeting stiles. (Specifier Note: DELETE sills for patio door styles not project specific.) 1. In-Swing Patio Door: Dark bronze anodized aluminum with interior oak trim and adjustable oak threshold in combination with vinyl fin-and-bulb door sweep [option: and ½ inch maximum height to meet ADA requirements]. 2. Out-Swing Patio Door: Dark bronze anodized aluminum with interior oak trim and vinyl fin-and-bulb door sweep [option: and ½ inch maximum height to meet ADA requirements]. 3. Sliding Patio Door: Tan colored pultruded fiberglass with solid oak interior trim and stainless steel track cap. G. Hardware (Specifier Note: DELETE hardware for patio door styles not project specific.) 1. [In-Swing Patio Door] [Out-Swing Patio Door] a. Hinges: [standard: 4x4 Heavy gauge solid brass with stainless steel pins.] [option: Adjustable 4x4 heavy gauge solid brass with stainless steel pins.] b. Lock: [standard: Single point mortise with lever handle and thumb turn dead bolt.] [option: Manually activated multipoint system.] c. Finish: [standard: Polished Brass] [options: [Antique Brass] [Black Powder Coat] [Brushed Chrome] [Brushed Nickel] [Polished Chrome] [Oil Rubbed Bronze] [Western Pewter] [White Powder Coat]] 2. Sliding Patio Door a. Sliding System: Steel ball bearing tandem rollers in heavy duty housing with cam type slip proof height adjustment. (Specifier Note: Automatically activated multipoint system lock is standard for quad doors only. SELECT automatic option when specifying four panel doors.) b. Lock: [standard: Single point mortise.] [option: Automatically activated multipoint system.] c. Finish: [standard: Polished Brass] [options: [Antique Brass] [Black Powder Coat] [Brushed Chrome] [Brushed Nickel] [Polished Chrome] [Oil Rubbed Bronze] [Western Pewter] [White Powder Coat]] Typical Home Sliding Glass Door

189 H. Glazing (Specifier Note: Various types of glass are available. The most common types have been included here. Contact a JELD-WEN representative when other options are required. DELETE glass not project specific.) (Specifier Note: Reflective glare from glazing has been found to affect the beach nesting of turtles in coastal environments. Some governing authorities require the use of turtle glass which uses tinted glass to achieve an industry-approved, inside-to-outside visible light transmittance value of 45% or less (visible spectrum = 400 to 700 nanometers). Verify the requirements for turtle glass with local authorities in coastal environments.) (Specifier Note: Tempered glass is required by code. Hurricane glass or laminated glass will also meet these requirements.) (Specifier Note: Laminated glass uses a vinyl interlayer to provide added security against impact, comfort with higher STC ratings and energy savings by blocking UV energy. Hurricane glass differs from laminated by a thicker vinyl interlayer. Specify hurricane glass over laminated when windborne debris impact resistance is required.) 1. Strength: [standard: Tempered] [options: Hurricane Glass] [Laminated] 2. Insulated Glass (standard): a. Two panes of tempered glass utilizing a continuous roll formed stainless steel spacer and dual seal sealant. b. Overall Nominal Thickness: 3/4 inch (19mm) c. Type: [standard: Type 1- Clear] [options: [Type 2 Tinted [Bronze] [Gray] [Green]] [Specialty Glass [Obscure] [Glue Chip] [Narrow Reed] [Rain]]] (Specifier Note: Low E is standard on all patio doors but may be deleted at the design professional s option. DELETE coatings if not project specific.) d. Coatings: Low-E on surface 2 (Specifier Note: Argon option is only available with Low E coating and cannot be used with capillary tubes.) (Specifier Note: Installations at elevations above 4,000 feet Mean Sea Level require glazing known as High Altitude glazing with capillary tubes to equalize environmental stress.) OR e. Air Space: [Air] [Air with capillary tubes] [Argon] 3. Monolithic Glass (option): Sliding Glass Door Typical Home

190 a. Overall Nominal Thickness: [1/8 inch (3mm)] [(Specifier Note: for hurricane or laminated glass) 3/16 inch (7mm)] b. Type: [standard: Type 1- Clear] [option: [Type 2 Tinted [Bronze] [Gray] [Green]] [Specialty Glass [Obscure] [Glue Chip] [Narrow Reed] [Rain]]] 2.4 PATIO DOOR ACCESSORIES (Specifier Note: Exterior sliding insect screens are available on in-swing and sliding patio door units only. DELETE exterior sliding insect screens if not project specific.) A. Exterior Sliding Insect Screen 1. Material: Charcoal fiberglass screen cloth (18 by16 mesh) set in extruded aluminum frame. 2. Frame Color: [Black Licorice] [Brilliant White] [Chestnut Bronze] [Desert Sand] [French Vanilla] [Hartford Green] [Heirloom White] [Hunter Green] [Mesa Red] [Redwood] [Sage Brown] [Smoke] B. Grilles (Specifier Note: SDL & PDL Grilles are not available for textured glass, grilles between the glass are not available on monolithic glass. SELECT grilles, profiles, and width based on the desired aesthetic appearance of the patio door. DELETE grilles not project specific.) 1. Simulated Divided Lites (SDL) a. Exterior Muntins 1) Material: Extruded aluminum permanently applied to exterior of insulating glass unit. (Specifier Note: Utilize the bead stop profile for a flattened curve and putty profile for a deeper, angular aesthetic.) 2) Profile: [Bead Stop] [Putty] 3) Pattern: As selected by Architect 4) Width: OR a) (Specifier Note: for bead stop profile) [7/8 inch (22mm)] [1-1/8 inch (28.5mm)] [1-3/8 inch (34.9mm)] [2-5/16 inch (59mm) (for simulated double-hung checkrail)] b) (Specifier Note: for putty profile) [7/8 inch (22mm)] [1-1/8 inch (28.5mm)] 5) Finish: Match exterior finish (Specifier Note: Internal shadow bar will give the appearance of a true divided lite and is standard on all SDL units. Internal shadow bar may be deleted at the design professional s option. DELETE internal shadow bar if not project specific.) Typical Home Sliding Glass Door

191 b. Internal Shadow Bar: [standard: Light Bronze] [option: Silver] c. Interior Muntins 1) Material: Clear pine permanently bonded to interior of insulating glass unit. 2) Profile: Match exterior muntin OR 2. Full Surround Wood Grilles a. Material: Unfinished clear pine b. Profile: Rectangular c. Pattern: As selected by Architect d. Size: [7/8 inch (22mm)] [1-1/8 inch (28.5mm)] [1-3/8 inch (34.9mm)] OR 3. Grilles Between the Glass (GBG) a. Material: Made of roll formed aluminum suspended within the air cavity. (Specifier Note: Utilize flat for a narrow aesthetic and a contour profile for a wider aesthetic.) b. Profile: [Flat] [Contour] c. Pattern: As selected by Architect d. Width: OR 1) (Specifier Note: for flat profile) [5/8 inch (22mm)] 2) (Specifier Note: for contour profile) [23/32 inch (18.25mm)] [1 inch (25.4mm)] e. Finish: [Brilliant White] [Chestnut Brown] [Desert Sand] [French Vanilla] [Hartford Green] [Mesa Red] OR 4. Precise Divided Lites (PDL) a. Material: [Wood] [Extruded aluminum] permanently applied to exterior of insulating glass unit. b. Width: [¾ inch (19.1mm)] [1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm)] Sliding Glass Door Typical Home

192 2.5 CONSTRUCTION ACCESSORIES (Specifier Note: Construction Accessories compatible with patio doors and required installation may be specified in this section or in related sections. COORDINATE with related sections to not duplicate information.) A. Flashing 1. Refer to Section [ Unit Masonry] [ Flashing and Sheet Metal] [insert section number and title]. B. Sealants OR 1. Refer to Section [ Joint Sealants] [insert section number and title]. (Specifier Note: For sealants specified within this section list recommended products.) 2. Provide manufacturer recommended sealants maintain watertight conditions. 3. Products: a. [Insert products and manufacturer] 2.6 FABRICATION 2.7 FINISH 1. Frame: Top and bottom rails are solid pine veneer laminated to kiln dried edge-and-end-glued core. Stiles are same veneer laminated to timberstrand core. 2. Glass: Mounted using silicone glazing compound on exterior and acrylic sealant on interior. (Specifier Note: Patio door interior wood is left unfinished for field finishing unless indicated otherwise. DELETE finish options not project specific.) A. Interior: OR OR OR 1. [standard: Unfinished] [option: Primed] 2. Pre-finished Options: a. Paint - [Extra White] [Moderate White] [Natural Choice] [Pure white] b. Stain - [Cherry] [Cordovan] [Fruitwood] [Wheat] c. Clear Lacquer Typical Home Sliding Glass Door

193 AND B. Exterior: 1. [standard: Factory-applied latex primer] [option: Natural] (Specifier Note: Prefinished sash only colors are available for in-swing and out-swing patio doors only. SELECT frame color AND sash color when specifying the sash only color option.) 2. Pre-finished Sash Only Color Options: [Hand Rubbed Copper] [Natural Copper] [Speckled Patina] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install patio doors in accordance with manufacturer s installation guidelines and recommendations. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Inspect patio door prior to installation. B. Inspect rough opening for compliance with patio door manufacturer recommendations. Verify rough opening conditions are within recommended tolerances. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Form sheet metal sill pan in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations. B. Prepare patio door for installation in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations. 3.4 INSTALLATION (Specifier Note: DELETE installation paragraphs not project specific.) A. Insert patio door into rough opening (for use on patio doors units with exterior trim): 1. Shim side jambs straight. 2. Inspect patio door for square, level and plumb. 3. Fasten patio door through exterior trim around entire patio door. 4. Test and adjust for smooth operation of patio door. Sliding Glass Door Typical Home

194 5. Set all nails below wood surface. 6. Structurally secure head and side jambs through shims with mechanical fasteners. 7. Structurally secure sill with mechanical fasteners. 8. Apply flashing to sill, jambs and header. 9. Apply sealant to upper corners and at sill. 10. Install backer rod and sealant at rough opening and door jamb gap. 11. Ensure seal between sill pan and inside face of patio door sill. 12. Install lock set hardware per manufacturer s instructions. B. Insert patio door into rough opening (for use on patio door units without exterior trim): 1. Shim side jambs straight. 2. Inspect patio door for square, level and plumb. 3. Fasten patio door through jamb, shim and into rough opening jamb. 4. Test and adjust for smooth operation of patio door. 5. Structurally secure head and side jambs through shims with mechanical fasteners. 6. Structurally secure sill with mechanical fasteners. 7. Install backer rod and sealant at exterior jambs and head. 8. Seal interior joints between rough opening and jambs with backer rod and sealant. 9. Ensure seal between sill pan and inside face of patio door sill. 10. Install lock set hardware per manufacturer s instructions. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturers Field Services: Field inspections. 3.6 CLEANING A. Remove Preserve film from glass. B. Clean the exterior surface and glass with mild soap and water. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed patio doors from damage. Typical Home Sliding Glass Door

195 3.8 SCHEDULES (Specifier Note: Below are sample schedules that require editing for specific project. When a single type of patio door is utilized on a project, Specifier may elect to delete the schedule in its entirety. When schedules are included on the drawings, schedules should be deleted from the specification.) A. Patio Door Type A 1. Style: Custom 2. Operation: In-Swing 3. Size: 2 panel, 6-0 x Exterior Finish: Natural and Hand Rubbed Copper Sash 5. Interior Finish: Stained, Cherry 6. Panel Layout: Standard 7. Exterior Trim: 3-1/2 Flat Casing 8. Mull Cap: 1 inch 9. Sill: Standard with ADA 10. Hardware: Adjustable Hinges, Multipoint Lock 11. Hardware Finish: Oil Rubbed Bronze 12. Glazing: Insulated, Rain pattern, Air with capillary tubes 13. Grilles: 1-1/8 inch Full Surround 14. Screen Frame Color: Smoke END OF SECTION Sliding Glass Door Typical Home

196 SECTION GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: This Section includes, but shall not be limited to, glazed curtain wall systems to receive glazing, embedded items and connections for attaching systems to building structure as indicated on the Drawings. Systems shall have thermal break materials. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide the manufacturer's glazed curtain wall systems, adapted to the application indicated, and modified as required to comply with performance requirements and materials specified, as demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's corresponding systems according to test methods indicated. 1. Performance Requirements: a. Air Infiltration: More than cfm ( m 3 /s) per square foot (0.09 m 2 ) (projected area of module). b. Water Leakage: There shall be no uncontrolled water entry. c. Structural Performance: Structural performance shall be based on a maximum allowable deflection of L/175 of the span or 3/4 inch (19 mm) maximum. d. Thermal Cycling: There shall be no buckling, stress on glass, edge seal failure, excess stress on structure, anchors and fasteners, or reduction in performance. e. Thermal Transmittance: Thermal transmittance due to conduction (Uc) shall not be greater than 0.60 Btu/hour/ft 2 / F. Condensation resistance factor (CRF) shall not be less than 69. f. Seismic Cycling: There shall be no life/safety type failures (glass breakage, anchor failures, structural damage, etc.). g. Sound Rating: The system shall have a sound transmission class (STC) rating of 32 and an outdoor-indoor transmission class (OITC) rating of SUBMITTALS A. General: See Section Submittal Procedures. 1. Product Data: Submit product data showing material proposed. 2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each product and accessory required. 3. Samples: If colors not preselected or scheduled, submit samples for initial color selection. Submit samples for verification purposes. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Design Data: Submit design calculations for the glazed curtain wall system and the connections for attaching them to the structure. 2. Test Reports: Submit two copies each, plus the number the Contractor wants returned, of tests. 3. Certificates: a. Submit designer's certification. b. Submit manufacturer's certification that the Installer is approved. Retain below for project requiring LEED certification. Typical Home Curtain Walls

SECTION UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM

SECTION UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04320 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete masonry and face brick units. B. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under

More information

A. ASTM C190 - Test Method for Tensile Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars

A. ASTM C190 - Test Method for Tensile Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars SECTION 04850 (04 40 00) MSI PRECAST STONE VENEER SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. MSI Precast Stone Veneer for exterior and interior vertical surfaces. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS Specifier Notes:

More information

SPECIFICATION GUIDELINE

SPECIFICATION GUIDELINE SPECIFICATION GUIDELINE Environmental Stoneworks Corporate Office 6300 East Stapleton Drive South Denver, CO 80216 Phone (303) 309-3040 Fax (303) 309-3059 www.estoneworks.com Environmental Stoneworks specification

More information

SPECIFICATION GUIDELINE

SPECIFICATION GUIDELINE Environmental StoneWorks specification guideline should be used to assist design professionals in the preparation of projects. Edit and delete items that may not be applicable. Verify all referenced section

More information

THIN VENEER STONE ASSEMBLIES SECTION

THIN VENEER STONE ASSEMBLIES SECTION www.buechelstone.com THIN VENEER STONE ASSEMBLIES SECTION 04 42 11 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Section Includes A. Non-load bearing, natural thin veneer applied with cement mortar to a structural back-up wall including

More information

Product Guide Specification

Product Guide Specification Natural Stone Veneers International, Inc. March 2015 PO Box 347 Fond du Lac, Wisconsin 54936 Toll Free (877) 923-2800 Phone (920) 923-2800 Fax (920) 923-3800 Website www.nsvi.com E-mail info@nsvi.com Product

More information

Editing notes to assist users are separated from specification text by rows of asterisks. Delete these notes prior to final printing.

Editing notes to assist users are separated from specification text by rows of asterisks. Delete these notes prior to final printing. SECTION 09635 LIMESTONE FLOORING This guide specification has been prepared by TexaStone Quarries LLC to assist design professionals in the preparation of a specification section covering cut limestone

More information

A. MASONRY MASONRY SECTION General Requirements: Division One is applicable in full hereto.

A. MASONRY MASONRY SECTION General Requirements: Division One is applicable in full hereto. PHJN1010CU SECTION 0400 MASONRY A. MASONRY 1. General Requirements: Division One is applicable in full hereto. 2. General: Workmanship shall be first class, with horizontal courses level, vertical joints

More information

Product Guide Specification

Product Guide Specification Natural Stone Veneers International, Inc. June 2017 PO Box 347 Fond du Lac, Wisconsin 54936 Toll Free (877) 923-2800 Phone (920) 923-2800 Fax (920) 923-3800 Website www.nsvi.com E-mail info@nsvi.com Product

More information

BEARING METAL STUD FRAMING

BEARING METAL STUD FRAMING L-1 Section 05410 Long Form Specification LOAD BEARING METAL STUD FRAMING This section includes axially loaded steel studs, with unique slotted top channels, usually of 0.91, 1.2 and 1.5 mm (16, 18, or

More information

1.02 STANDARD REFERENCES: The following standard specifications shall apply to the Work of this Section as indicated:

1.02 STANDARD REFERENCES: The following standard specifications shall apply to the Work of this Section as indicated: SECTION 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the masonry construction as shown on the drawings or as

More information

INSULATED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Section 04220

INSULATED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Section 04220 INSULATED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Section 04220 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Summary A. Section Includes 1. Insulated masonry wall units (CMU's) 2. Decorative insulated masonry wall units 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples:

More information

SECTION [ ] COILING COUNTER DOORS. Display hidden notes to specifier. (Don't know how? Click Here)

SECTION [ ] COILING COUNTER DOORS. Display hidden notes to specifier. (Don't know how? Click Here) SECTION 08332 [08 33 13] COILING COUNTER DOORS Display hidden notes to specifier. (Don't know how? Click Here) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coiling Metal Counter Doors. B. Coiling Metal Counter

More information

1. Section , Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies. B. ACI 530/ASCE 5 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures

1. Section , Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies. B. ACI 530/ASCE 5 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures SECTION 04 22 00 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Includes: This Section includes the furnishing and installation of concrete masonry units, reinforcing steel, miscellaneous masonry

More information

COLLEGE CLASSROOM & DORMITORY SPECIFICATION SECTION 08100

COLLEGE CLASSROOM & DORMITORY SPECIFICATION SECTION 08100 COLLEGE CLASSROOM & DORMITORY SPECIFICATION SECTION 08100 Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. The work under this section shall include the furnishing of all items shown on the drawings and as specified,

More information

NOVABRIK MORTARLESS CONCRETE BRICK VENEER SPECIFICATION. MASTERFORMAT SECTION (Mortarless Concrete Brick Veneer)

NOVABRIK MORTARLESS CONCRETE BRICK VENEER SPECIFICATION. MASTERFORMAT SECTION (Mortarless Concrete Brick Veneer) NOVABRIK MORTARLESS CONCRETE BRICK VENEER SPECIFICATION MASTERFORMAT SECTION 04818 (Mortarless Concrete Brick Veneer) Spec_USA_En_18102005.doc 12/1/2005 Novabrik Page 2 Section 04818 NOVABRIK MORTARLESS

More information

SECTION UNIT MASONRY

SECTION UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete Masonry Units. B. Mortar and Grout. C. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS SECTION 042000 UNIT MASONRY A. Unless otherwise noted

More information

Corium Brick Rainscreen System Specifications

Corium Brick Rainscreen System Specifications CORIUM BRICK RAINSCREEN SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Included: The Work of this Section shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Corium brick plates 2. Galvanized and coated

More information

HammerStone Manufactured stone veneers for commercial & residential applications

HammerStone Manufactured stone veneers for commercial & residential applications HammerStone Manufactured stone veneers for commercial & residential applications Veneer Stone Specification Guide Section 04711: Manufactured Stone Veneer Use this specification guide for each individual

More information

Installation Guide Wall Panels

Installation Guide Wall Panels Installation Guide Wall Panels Jointless or Dry-Stacked Installation (Read Prior to installation) The MStone system is a jointless / dry-stacked installation where panels and corners fit tightly together

More information

SECTION ROOF SPECIALTIES

SECTION ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION SECTION 07 71 00 1. Use this section only for NCA projects. 2. Delete between // // if not applicable to project. Also delete any other item or paragraph not applicable

More information

MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS Section ST. ASTIER LIME PLASTER (NHL) PLASTER ON CONCRETE

MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS Section ST. ASTIER LIME PLASTER (NHL) PLASTER ON CONCRETE MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS Section 09225 ST. ASTIER LIME PLASTER (NHL) PLASTER ON CONCRETE ST. ASTIER NATURAL HYDRAULIC LIME PLASTER PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. This Section includes St. Astier Natural

More information

EDGEWATER, FLORIDA JUNE 14, 2010

EDGEWATER, FLORIDA JUNE 14, 2010 SECTION 09 2400 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification

More information

SECTION ORNAMENTAL ALUMINUM RAILING. ** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Superior Aluminum Products, Inc.; Ornamental aluminum railing products.

SECTION ORNAMENTAL ALUMINUM RAILING. ** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Superior Aluminum Products, Inc.; Ornamental aluminum railing products. SECTION 05720 ORNAMENTAL ALUMINUM RAILING ** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Superior Aluminum Products, Inc.; Ornamental aluminum railing products. This section is based on the products of Superior Aluminum Products,

More information

SECTION RADIATION SHIELDING ENCLOSURE Low Intensity Radiation Protection

SECTION RADIATION SHIELDING ENCLOSURE Low Intensity Radiation Protection SECTION 13090 RADIATION SHIELDING ENCLOSURE Low Intensity Radiation Protection Prepared by: 90 Dayton Avenue, Unit 4B, Suite 13 Passaic, NJ 07055 (973) 574-9077 13090-1 LOW INTENSITY RADIATION PROTECTION

More information

SECTION SPLIT FACE CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

SECTION SPLIT FACE CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS SECTION 04223 SPLIT FACE CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS ***** E. Dillon & Company manufactures the following high quality, custom produced, architectural concrete masonry units (CMU) using superior colored aggregates

More information

SECTION MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER

SECTION MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER TM Dutch Quality Stone 18012 Dover Road Mt. Eaton, OH 44659 Tel: (330) 359-7866 Fax: (330) 359-5990 e-mail: info@dutchqualitystone.com website: www.dutchqualitystone.com SECTION 04 73 00 MANUFACTURED MASONRY

More information

DIVISION 04 MASONRY CAST STONE. A. Design Considerations. 1. Cast stone shall comply with ASTM C1364, Standard Specification for Cast Stone.

DIVISION 04 MASONRY CAST STONE. A. Design Considerations. 1. Cast stone shall comply with ASTM C1364, Standard Specification for Cast Stone. DIVISION 04 MASONRY 04720 CAST STONE A. Design Considerations 1. Cast stone shall comply with ASTM C1364, Standard Specification for Cast Stone. 2. Care must be taken in the design of individual units

More information

MANUFACTURER S SPECIFICATION

MANUFACTURER S SPECIFICATION MANUFACTURER S SPECIFICATION Eldorado Stone Corporation PO Box 489 Carnation, WA 98014 Tel: (800) 925-1491 Fax: (425) 333-4755 e-mail: general@eldoradostone.com website: www.eldoradostone.com SECTION 04730

More information

SECTION NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

SECTION NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION SECTION 09 22 16 1. Use this section only for NCA projects. 2. Delete between //----// if not applicable to project. Also delete any other item or paragraph not applicable

More information

SECTION OVERHEAD COILING FIRE DOORS MODEL 662 OVERHEAD COILING COUNTER FIRE DOORS WITH INTEGRAL FRAME

SECTION OVERHEAD COILING FIRE DOORS MODEL 662 OVERHEAD COILING COUNTER FIRE DOORS WITH INTEGRAL FRAME SECTION 08331 OVERHEAD COILING FIRE DOORS MODEL 662 OVERHEAD COILING COUNTER FIRE DOORS WITH INTEGRAL FRAME Display hidden notes to specifier. (Don't know how? Click Here) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

More information

SECTION MASONRY ACCESSORIES

SECTION MASONRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to provide masonry accessories as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein.

More information

SECTION MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER. A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured stone veneer masonry, accessories, and related materials.

SECTION MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER. A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured stone veneer masonry, accessories, and related materials. SECTION 04 70 00 MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured stone veneer masonry, accessories, and related materials. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For

More information

Stonecraft Industies 8300 County Road Holmesville, OH

Stonecraft Industies 8300 County Road Holmesville, OH Stonecraft Industies 8300 County Road Holmesville, OH Tel: (888) 580-6448 e-mail: customercare@stonecraft.com website: www.stonecraft.com SECTION 04 73 00 MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER GENERAL NOTES TO SPECIFIER:

More information

Northpointe Renovation EPN #1701 F/A Project #17027 September 8, 2017

Northpointe Renovation EPN #1701 F/A Project #17027 September 8, 2017 SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification

More information

SECTION CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

SECTION CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SECTION 042200 - PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply

More information

SECTION CEMENT BOARD SUPPORTED ADHERED MASONRY VENEER. 2. Installation materials including adhesives, mortars, and pointing mortars.

SECTION CEMENT BOARD SUPPORTED ADHERED MASONRY VENEER. 2. Installation materials including adhesives, mortars, and pointing mortars. (Specifier Note: The purpose of this guide specification is to assist the Specifier in correctly specifying cement board supported adhered masonry. The Specifier needs to edit these guide specifications

More information

A. Coordinate concrete unit masonry (also termed CMU and block ) work with work before and after, especially:

A. Coordinate concrete unit masonry (also termed CMU and block ) work with work before and after, especially: 04222 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY (UNREINFORCED ONLY) SPECIFIER: Use this section only for UNREINFORCED concrete masonry. Its only reinforcement is in the horizontal joints. It covers ONLY plain blockwork (no

More information

SECTION 1043 FENCE MATERIAL

SECTION 1043 FENCE MATERIAL SECTION 1043 FENCE MATERIAL 1043.1 Scope. This specification covers the material required in the construction of chainlink fence and woven wire fence. 1043.2 Basis of Acceptance. The basis of acceptance

More information

SECTION PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING INSULATION

SECTION PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL SECTION 07213 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING INSULATION Microsoft Word Instructions: Display hidden notes to specifier by using "Tools"/"Options"/"View"/"Hidden Text". 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre-Engineered

More information

HCD DSA OSHPD 1 2 1/AC AC SS SS/CC

HCD DSA OSHPD 1 2 1/AC AC SS SS/CC CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE MATRIX ADOPTION TABLE CHAPTER 25 GYPSUM BOARD AND PLASTER (Matrix Adoption Tables are non-regulatory, intended only as an aid to the user. See Chapter 1 for state agency authority

More information

1.2 Reference Standard: NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association Grading Standards.

1.2 Reference Standard: NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association Grading Standards. WOOD FLOORING GENERAL INFORMATION 1.1 This section applies to factory finished wood strip flooring. 1.2 Reference Standard: NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association Grading Standards. 1.3

More information

EXCEL Medical Waste - Equipment Installation Section SECTION GYPSUM BOARD

EXCEL Medical Waste - Equipment Installation Section SECTION GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies installation and finishing of gypsum board. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Installation of steel framing members for walls, partitions,

More information

SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall and ceiling framing, 20 gauge. B. Metal channel suspended ceiling framing. C. Gypsum board. D. Gypsum sheathing.

More information

Aluminum Flush Doors and Frames SPECIFICATIONS. Section [8120] PART 1 GENERAL

Aluminum Flush Doors and Frames SPECIFICATIONS. Section [8120] PART 1 GENERAL Aluminum Flush Doors and Frames SPECIFICATIONS Section 081116 [8120] Cline Aluminum Doors, Inc. 112 32nd Avenue West Bradenton, FL 34205-8907 Toll-Free (800) 648-6736 Office (941) 746-4104 Fax (941) 746-5153

More information

Structural Tests and Special Inspections Form. Inspection of Fabricators (1704.2)

Structural Tests and Special Inspections Form. Inspection of Fabricators (1704.2) Inspection of Fabricators (1704.2) Furnish inspection reports (1704.2.1) - Fabricators that have not been approved Provide a Certificate of Compliance (1704.2.2) - Approved Fabricators Steel Construction

More information

Technical Notes 28 - Anchored Brick Veneer, Wood Frame Construction Rev August 2002

Technical Notes 28 - Anchored Brick Veneer, Wood Frame Construction Rev August 2002 Technical Notes 28 - Anchored Brick Veneer, Wood Frame Construction Rev August 2002 Abstract: This Technical Notes deals with the prescriptive design of brick veneer with wood frame construction in buildings

More information

SECTION BRICK FACED ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE. Display hidden notes to specifier by using Tools / Options / View / Hidden Text.

SECTION BRICK FACED ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE. Display hidden notes to specifier by using Tools / Options / View / Hidden Text. SECTION 03460 BRICK FACED ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE Display hidden notes to specifier by using Tools / Options / View / Hidden Text. PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Site Cast or Tilt-Up Brick

More information

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

TECHNICAL INFORMATION TECHNICAL INFORMATION SECTION 07320 TWO-PIECE TAPERED MISSION CLAY ROOFING TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formed clay roofing tiles, complete with components and other required accessories

More information

REFLECTIVE FACE CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

REFLECTIVE FACE CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS SECTION 04221 REFLECTIVE FACE CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS ***** E. Dillon & Company manufactures the following high quality, custom produced, architectural concrete masonry units (CMU) using superior colored

More information

1. Decks, balconies, and sun porches 2. Walkways, ramps, and stairways 3. Patios and courtyards

1. Decks, balconies, and sun porches 2. Walkways, ramps, and stairways 3. Patios and courtyards SECTION 07185 TRAFFIC MEMBRANE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Traffic membrane, consisting of welded seam PVC waterproofing, over f following surfaces: 1. Decks, balconies, and sun porches 2. Walkways,

More information

SECTION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

SECTION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS SECTION 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification

More information

SECTION GYPSUM BOARD

SECTION GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Documents: General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and Drawings are collectively applicable

More information

SECTION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Contractor shall furnish all work and materials, including cement, sand and coarse aggregate, water, admixtures, curing

More information

SECTION STONE COUNTERTOPS

SECTION STONE COUNTERTOPS SPEC DOCS Z1 1 SECTION 123640 - STONE COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of dimensioned stone: 1. Granite for kitchen countertops. 2. Marble for bathroom

More information

Specifiers: Click on the icon in the WORD toolbar to reveal detailed instructions

Specifiers: Click on the icon in the WORD toolbar to reveal detailed instructions Specifiers: Click on the icon in the WORD toolbar to reveal detailed instructions (Specifier Note: The purpose of this guide specification is to assist the specifier in correctly specifying perforated

More information

Presenting a complete line of Limestone Classics TM Trim and Accent Stone from Indiana Limestone Company. Genuine Indiana Limestone.

Presenting a complete line of Limestone Classics TM Trim and Accent Stone from Indiana Limestone Company. Genuine Indiana Limestone. Presenting a complete line of Limestone Classics Trim and Accent Stone from Indiana Limestone Company. Genuine Indiana Limestone. The natural and innovative finishing touch for your residential and commercial

More information

JC Code & Construction Consultants, Inc. Advanced Training: The FBC & ASTM C 1063

JC Code & Construction Consultants, Inc. Advanced Training: The FBC & ASTM C 1063 JC Code & Construction Consultants, Inc. Advanced Training: The FBC & ASTM C 1063 1 Welcome! This course was developed by : JC Code & Construction Consultants, Inc. DBPR Provider Number 0003379 www.jccode.com

More information

PERM-FLEX ASSEMBLY DIRECT APPLICATION TO CEMENTITIOUS SUBSTRATES MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATION / SECTION 09960

PERM-FLEX ASSEMBLY DIRECT APPLICATION TO CEMENTITIOUS SUBSTRATES MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATION / SECTION 09960 STUC-O-FLEX PERM-FLEX ASSEMBLY DIRECT APPLICATION TO CEMENTITIOUS SUBSTRATES MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATION / SECTION 09960 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION Provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary

More information

SECTION TURBINE VENTILATORS

SECTION TURBINE VENTILATORS SECTION 07 72 00 TURBINE VENTILATORS **This is a CSI Three-Part Specification using CSI MasterFormat 2004-2010 Section Numbers and Titles. This specification must be edited to suit your particular project.

More information

SECTION COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

SECTION COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 05400 PART I - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: Work of this Section shall include all materials and installation necessary to provide all cold formed metal framing. B. This Section includes:

More information

Louis Armstrong New Orleans International Airport NOAB Project # North Terminal Development Program Phase 1

Louis Armstrong New Orleans International Airport NOAB Project # North Terminal Development Program Phase 1 Louis Armstrong New Orleans International Airport NOAB Project # 8910-01233 PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION 07 71 29 - MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions

More information

Page 1 of 5

Page 1 of 5 SPECIFICATIONS COMPOSITE MATERIAL PANEL SYSTEM ESTOLGA 1000 DRY SEAL SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exterior cladding consisting of formed metal composite material (MCM) sheet, secondary

More information

PROJECT LOCATION SECTION COPPER METAL PLATE WALL PANELS

PROJECT LOCATION SECTION COPPER METAL PLATE WALL PANELS SECTION 07 4213.25 PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Copper metal plate wall panels. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 4000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Wall panel substrates support framing.

More information

SECTION CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES (GALVANIZED) A. Fence framework, fabric, gates, and accessories.

SECTION CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES (GALVANIZED) A. Fence framework, fabric, gates, and accessories. SECTION 02830 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES (GALVANIZED) 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Section Includes A. Fence framework, fabric, gates, and accessories. B. Excavation for post bases; concrete footing for posts. C.

More information

Anchor bolts ASTM F1554, Gr. 36 Wide flange beams ASTM A992, Fy = 50 ksi Misc. structural steel ASTM A36, Fy = 36 ksi

Anchor bolts ASTM F1554, Gr. 36 Wide flange beams ASTM A992, Fy = 50 ksi Misc. structural steel ASTM A36, Fy = 36 ksi STRUCTURAL NOTES MATERIAL STRENGTHS Structural Steel Reinforcing Steel Concrete Masonry Structural Lumber Anchor bolts ASTM F1554, Gr. 36 Wide flange beams ASTM A992, Fy = 50 ksi Misc. structural steel

More information

Introducing a complete line of Limestone Classics TM Building Veneers from Indiana Limestone Company. Genuine Indiana Limestone the natural and

Introducing a complete line of Limestone Classics TM Building Veneers from Indiana Limestone Company. Genuine Indiana Limestone the natural and Introducing a complete line of Limestone Classics Building Veneers from Indiana Limestone Company. Genuine Indiana Limestone the natural and innovative design solution for your residential and commercial

More information

SECTION CONCRETE ROOF TILE

SECTION CONCRETE ROOF TILE SECTION 07321 CONCRETE ROOF TILE Display hidden notes to specifier. (Don't know how? Click Here) Copyright 2005-2011 ARCAT, Inc. - All rights reserved PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100

More information

Residential Building Inspections

Residential Building Inspections Residential Building Inspections Foundations, Grade Beams, Pile Caps, Foundation Pads 1. All trenches or excavations and formwork shall be in accordance with the size(s) and configuration(s) as per approved

More information

Aluminum Component Pipe Railings

Aluminum Component Pipe Railings 1 SECTION 05 7360 ALUMINUM COMPONENT PIPE RAILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum component pipe handrails and railings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 02 9000: Landscaping: Installation

More information

Section PANEL SIGNAGE

Section PANEL SIGNAGE Section 10 14 23 PANEL SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including FDOT DIVISION I GENERAL REQUIREMENTS & COVENANTS Specification Sections,

More information

PRESTON HEALTH SERVICES ARCHITECT'S NO. 2700

PRESTON HEALTH SERVICES ARCHITECT'S NO. 2700 SECTION 09 5113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification

More information

SECTION SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS

SECTION SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS SECTION 08360 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum Doors B. Track and Framing 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Prepared opening in masonry.

More information

SECTION CONCRETE PAVING SLABS SET IN MORTAR

SECTION CONCRETE PAVING SLABS SET IN MORTAR SECTION 32 14 13.16 CONCRETE PAVING SLABS SET IN MORTAR (1995 MasterFormat Section 02784) Note: This guide specification for the U.S. is for paving slabs mortared to a concrete base and grouted joints

More information

SECTION ORNAMENTAL ALUMINUM RAILING. ** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Superior Aluminum Products, Inc.; Ornamental aluminum railing products.

SECTION ORNAMENTAL ALUMINUM RAILING. ** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Superior Aluminum Products, Inc.; Ornamental aluminum railing products. SECTION 05720 ORNAMENTAL ALUMINUM RAILING ** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Superior Aluminum Products, Inc.; Ornamental aluminum railing products. This section is based on the products of Superior Aluminum Products,

More information

Specifications for FL-100 Soffit Panel

Specifications for FL-100 Soffit Panel Union Corrugating Company Specifications for FL-100 Soffit Panel SECTION 07410 METAL SOFFIT PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTON A. Section Includes: 1. Preformed metal soffit panel system 2. Associated

More information

SECTION ALUMINUM WINDOWS

SECTION ALUMINUM WINDOWS SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Storefront systems and aluminum framed glass doors. 2. Hardware, fasteners, accessories, filler pieces, etc., required

More information

Ceramic Glazed Brick Exterior Walls

Ceramic Glazed Brick Exterior Walls TECHNICAL NOTES on Brick Construction 12007 Sunrise Valley Drive, Suite 430, Reston, Virginia 20191 www.gobrick.com 703-620-0010 13 June 2017 Ceramic Glazed Brick Exterior Walls Abstract: Buildings and

More information

Technical Notes 24G - The Contemporary Bearing Wall - Detailing [Dec. 1968] (Reissued Feb. 1987) INTRODUCTION

Technical Notes 24G - The Contemporary Bearing Wall - Detailing [Dec. 1968] (Reissued Feb. 1987) INTRODUCTION Technical Notes 24G - The Contemporary Bearing Wall - Detailing [Dec. 1968] (Reissued Feb. 1987) INTRODUCTION The selection of a wall type and appropriate connection details is one of the most important

More information

OLD BRICK ORIGINALS KILN-FIRED THIN BRICK VENEER Installation Guide. RobinsonBrick.com

OLD BRICK ORIGINALS KILN-FIRED THIN BRICK VENEER Installation Guide. RobinsonBrick.com OLD BRICK ORIGINALS KILN-FIRED THIN BRICK VENEER Installation Guide RobinsonBrick.com OLD BRICK ORIGINALS THIN BRICK VENEER Page 2 INTRODUCTION Check local building codes for proper installation guidelines

More information

SECTION SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 522 SERIES ALUMINUM SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS. Display hidden notes to specifier. (Don't know how?

SECTION SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 522 SERIES ALUMINUM SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS. Display hidden notes to specifier. (Don't know how? SECTION 08360 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 522 SERIES ALUMINUM SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS Display hidden notes to specifier. (Don't know how? Click Here) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glazed Aluminum

More information

Narrow Modular Pavers (NMP) for Sand-Set Installations

Narrow Modular Pavers (NMP) for Sand-Set Installations The following specification refers to the Stepstone, Inc. product known as: Narrow Modular Pavers (NMP) for Sand-Set Installations Narrow Modular Pavers are part of the California Architectural Paver line

More information

SECTION CLAY BARREL TILE ROOFING. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

SECTION CLAY BARREL TILE ROOFING. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): SECTION 07320 CLAY BARREL TILE ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related Sections: 1. 02072 - Removals. 2. 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials

More information

SECTION DIMENSION STONE CLADDING

SECTION DIMENSION STONE CLADDING SECTION 04851 DIMENSION STONE CLADDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes dimension stone panels set with individual anchors,. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division

More information

Senergy Platinum CI Stucco Typical details for an impact resistant cement plaster stucco system featuring Neopor GPS Plus Rigid Insulation Board

Senergy Platinum CI Stucco Typical details for an impact resistant cement plaster stucco system featuring Neopor GPS Plus Rigid Insulation Board Senergy Platinum CI Stucco Typical details for an impact resistant cement plaster stucco system featuring Neopor GPS Plus Rigid Insulation Board NOTES Senergy Platinum CI Stucco Typical details for an

More information

Division 11 - Equipment Section 11401

Division 11 - Equipment Section 11401 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Division 1 General Requirements applies and becomes a part of this Section of the Specification as fully as if repeated herein. B. Items of equipment which are included

More information

ACCESSORY STRUCTURE Building permit information For 1 & 2-family dwellings

ACCESSORY STRUCTURE Building permit information For 1 & 2-family dwellings ACCESSORY STRUCTURE Building permit information For 1 & 2-family dwellings Building Safety Department 400-2 nd Street South St. Cloud, MN 56301 (320) 255-7239 A building permit is required for any accessory

More information

SPECIFICATIONS FOR AluSystems Aluminum Composite Panels Series 20 Dry Joint 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RANGE OF WORK Section includes: Laminated panels and attachment systems for use as exterior cladding. A. Provide

More information

Series - 1

Series - 1 SECTION 08360 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 521 SERIES ALUMINUM SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS Display hidden notes to specifier by using Tools / Options / View / Hidden Text. On newer versions of Microsoft Word

More information

Details for Exterior Brick Masonry Veneer Supported by Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses

Details for Exterior Brick Masonry Veneer Supported by Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses Details for Exterior Brick Masonry Veneer Supported by Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses Released May 20, 2009 Updated March 9, 2011 Introduction: Wood frame structures with attached brick masonry veneer

More information

GENERAL SHALE NATURAL THIN ROCK VENEER Installation Guide. GeneralShale.com

GENERAL SHALE NATURAL THIN ROCK VENEER Installation Guide. GeneralShale.com GENERAL SHALE NATURAL THIN ROCK VENEER Installation Guide GeneralShale.com GENERAL SHALE NATURAL THIN ROCK VENEER Page 2 INTRODUCTION - TABLE OF CONTENTS Check local building codes for proper installation

More information

SECTION EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS

SECTION EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION SECTION 07 24 00 1. Use this section only for NCA projects. 2. Detail wall section, base edge, expansion and control joint conditions for each system. Show locations of

More information

GYPSUM BOARD SECTION GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL

GYPSUM BOARD SECTION GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 13686.00 GYPSUM BOARD 092116-1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: SECTION 092116 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division

More information

Section QUARTZ SURFACING COUNTERTOPS

Section QUARTZ SURFACING COUNTERTOPS Pental Quartz is a quartz-composite engineered stone that is suitable for virtually any interior surfacing application. Pental Quartz can be used for kitchen countertops, bathroom vanities, bar tops, wall

More information

SECTION STAY-IN-PLACE INSULATED CONCRETE FORMING SYSTEM

SECTION STAY-IN-PLACE INSULATED CONCRETE FORMING SYSTEM ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS MANUFACTURER: InterBlock LLC PO Box 1123, Sheboygan, WI 53082 Phone Number 920-207-7234 SECTION 03100 STAY-IN-PLACE INSULATED CONCRETE FORMING SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Summary

More information

ENKASONIC FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT 9110

ENKASONIC FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT 9110 ENKASONIC FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT 9110 GS1197 Section 13080 SECTION 09618 SOUND CONTROL MATTING Part I General 1.1 Summary A. Section includes a sound control material for achieving an STC and IIC rating in

More information

SECTION 07530CP EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING

SECTION 07530CP EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 07530CP EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING A. Section includes: 1. Adhered membrane roofing and flashing 2. Mechanically fastened roof insulation 3. Walkway pads 1.2 ARCHITECTURAL

More information

for Mortar-Set Concrete Tiling Installations

for Mortar-Set Concrete Tiling Installations The following specification refers to the Stepstone, Inc. product known as: Large Scale CalArc Pavers for Mortar-Set Concrete Tiling Installations Large Scale CalArc Pavers are part of the California Architectural

More information

SECTION RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING

SECTION RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING SECTION 09 65 16 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING SPEC WRITER NOTE: Delete text between // // not applicable to project. Edit remaining text to suit project. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.

More information

SECTION LOUVERS AND VENTS

SECTION LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION SECTION 08 90 00 1. Use this section only for NCA projects. 2. Delete between //----// if not applicable to project. Also delete any other item or paragraph not applicable

More information